• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Discourses
  • General Sūtra Section
  • Toh 112

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh112.pdf

སྙིང་རྗེ་པད་མ་དཀར་པོ།

The White Lotus of Compassion
Glossary

Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka
སྙིང་རྗེ་པད་མ་དཀར་པོ་ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོའི་མདོ།
snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra “The White Lotus of Compassion”
Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra

Toh 112

Degé Kangyur, vol. 50 (mdo sde, cha), folios 129.a–297.a

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Jinamitra
  • Surendrabodhi
  • Prajñāvarman
  • Bendé Yeshé Dé

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by Peter Alan Roberts and team
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2023

Current version v 1.2.20 (2024)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 6.02pm on Wednesday, 27th November 2024 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh112.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· Bodhisattvas’ Aspirations Determine Their Activity as Buddhas
· Evolution, History, and Context
· Sources and Comparison
· Chapter Summaries
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· Chapter 1: Turning the Wheel of the Dharma
· Chapter 2: The Dhāraṇī Entranceway
· Chapter 3: Generosity
· Chapter 4: The Prophecies to the Bodhisattvas
· Chapter 5: The Practice of Generosity
· Chapter 6: Conclusion
tr. The Translation
+ 6 chapters- 6 chapters
1. Turning the Wheel of the Dharma
2. The Dhāraṇī Entranceway
3. Generosity
4. The Prophecies to the Bodhisattvas
5. The Practice of Generosity
6. Conclusion
c. Colophon
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· Selected Versions of The White Lotus of Compassion
· Kangyur and Tengyur Texts
· Secondary Literature
· Other Resources
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Buddha Śākyamuni recounts one of his most significant previous lives, when he was a court priest to a king and made a detailed prayer to become a buddha, also causing the king and his princes, his own sons and disciples, and others to make their own prayers to become buddhas too. This is revealed to be not only the major event that is the origin of buddhas and bodhisattvas such as Amitābha, Akṣobhya, Avalokiteśvara, Mañjuśrī, and the thousand buddhas of our eon, but also the source and reason for Śākyamuni’s unsurpassed activity as a buddha.

s.­2

The “white lotus of compassion” in the title of this sūtra refers to Śākyamuni himself, emphasizing his superiority over all other buddhas, like a fragrant, healing white lotus among a bed of ordinary flowers. Śākyamuni chose to be reborn in an impure realm during a degenerate age, and therefore his compassion was greater than that of other buddhas.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

The sūtra was translated from the Tibetan with reference to the Sanskrit by Peter Alan Roberts. Tulku Yeshi Gyatso of the Sakya Monastery, Seattle, was the consulting lama who reviewed the translation. Guilaine Mala was the consultant for the Chinese versions. Emily Bower was the project manager, editor, and proofreader.

ac.­2

The translation was completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­3

The translation of this text has been made possible through the generous sponsorship of an anonymous donor.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The White Lotus of Compassion describes the origin of many buddhas and bodhisattvas, focusing in particular on the Buddha Śākyamuni. The “white lotus of compassion” in the title refers to Śākyamuni himself, emphasizing his superiority over all other buddhas, like a fragrant, healing white lotus among a bed of ordinary flowers.

i.­2

Most of the sūtra’s narrative, recounted by the Buddha on Vulture Peak Mountain, takes place in the distant past and concerns the cakravartin king Araṇemin, his thousand sons, his chief court priest Samudrareṇu, and Samudrareṇu’s followers and eighty-one sons, one of whom has sought enlightenment and become the Buddha Ratnagarbha. Samudrareṇu encourages people throughout the kingdom to aspire to attain enlightenment too, and eventually brings about the conditions for the king and many members of his court to make their own aspirations in the presence of the Buddha Ratnagarbha. On these occasions the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies the buddhahood of the individuals concerned. He prohesies that King Araṇemin will become the Buddha Amitābha; that 999 of Samudrareṇu’s disciples, together with five of his attendants, will become the 1,004 buddhas of our Fortunate Eon;1 and that Samudrareṇu himself will become the Buddha Śākyamuni. Origin stories for the Buddha Akṣobhya, for the Buddha Amitābha’s accompanying bodhisattvas Avalokiteśvara and Mahāsthāmaprāpta, and for the bodhisattvas Mañjuśrī and Samantabhadra are also told.

Bodhisattvas’ Aspirations Determine Their Activity as Buddhas

Evolution, History, and Context

Sources and Comparison

Chapter Summaries

Chapter 1: Turning the Wheel of the Dharma

Chapter 2: The Dhāraṇī Entranceway

Chapter 3: Generosity

Chapter 4: The Prophecies to the Bodhisattvas

Chapter 5: The Practice of Generosity

Chapter 6: Conclusion


Text Body

The Translation
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra
The White Lotus of Compassion

1.
Chapter 1

Turning the Wheel of the Dharma

[B1] [F.129.a]


1.­1

Homage to all buddhas and bodhisattvas.


1.­2

Thus did I hear at one time:14 the Bhagavat was residing at Rājagṛha, on Vulture Peak Mountain, accompanied by a great saṅgha of 62,000 bhikṣus who, with the exception of one individual‍—which is to say, Venerable Ānanda‍—were all arhats whose outflows had ceased, who were without kleśas, who were self-controlled, who had liberated minds, who had completely liberated wisdom, who were noble beings,15 who were great elephants, who had done what had to be done, who had accomplished what had to be accomplished, who had put down their burden, who had reached their goals, who had ended the fetters to existence, who had liberated their minds through true knowledge, and who had attained all the perfect, highest, most complete powers of the mind.16


2.
Chapter 2

The Dhāraṇī Entranceway

2.­1

Then the bodhisattva Ratnavairocana asked the Bhagavat, “Bhadanta Bhagavat, how does one distinguish day and night in the Padmā realm? What kinds of sounds are heard there? What kind of mental states do the bodhisattvas there have? What kind of dwelling do they dwell in?”

2.­2

“Noble son,” answered the Bhagavat, “the Padmā realm is continuously illuminated by the Buddha’s light. The time there that is known as night is when the flowers close, the songs of the birds diminish, and the Bhagavat and the bodhisattvas enjoy meditation and experience liberation’s joy and bliss. The time that is known as day is when the flowers are opened by a breeze, the birds sing beautifully, a rain of flowers falls, and supremely fragrant, pleasant, gentle breezes, the touch of which is delightful, blow in the four directions. The Bhagavat arises from his samādhi, the bodhisattvas [F.133.b] arise from their samādhis,33 and the Bhagavat Padmottara teaches the bodhisattva mahāsattvas the bodhisattva piṭaka, which transcends completely what is spoken of to śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas.


3.
Chapter 3

Generosity

3.­1

When the Bhagavat had concluded his miraculous manifestation, the bodhisattva mahāsattva Śāntimati asked the Bhagavat, “Bhagavat, by what cause and circumstances are the pure buddha realms of other buddhas unpolluted, free from the five degeneracies, and have the array of the various qualities of a buddha realm? All the bodhisattva mahāsattvas there have a perfection of the various kinds of good qualities and possess the various kinds of happiness. Even the words śrāvaka and pratyekabuddha are unknown there, let alone the word rebirth.


4.
Chapter 4

The Prophecies to the Bodhisattvas

4.­1

“Then, noble son, the tathāgata arhat samyaksam­buddha Ratnagarbha thought, ‘The brahmin Samudrareṇu has made many millions of beings aspire to, be fixed upon, and be dedicated to the highest, most complete enlightenment and has brought them to an irreversible level. I shall give them prophecies, telling them what their buddha realms will be.’

4.­2

“Then the Bhagavat entered the samādhi called never forgetting bodhicitta, and he smiled. That smile illuminated countless buddha realms with a vast radiance. He showed the array of qualities of those buddha realms to King Araṇemin and the many millions of beings. [F.170.a] At that time, the bodhisattva mahāsattvas in countless buddha realms in the ten directions saw that radiance, and through the power of the Buddha, they came to this world in order to see, pay homage to, and honor the Bhagavat and his saṅgha of bhikṣus.


5.
Chapter 5

The Practice of Generosity

5.­1

“Noble son, the bodhisattva mahāsattva Mahākāruṇika bowed down the five points of his body to the feet of the Tathāgata Ratnagarbha. He then sat down in front of the Tathāgata Ratnagarbha [F.261.a] and respectfully addressed this question to the Tathāgata Ratnagarbha: ‘Bhadanta Bhagavat, you have taught the path of bodhisattvas, the Dharma discourse on the entranceway instruction to samādhi and the entranceway to the purity of accumulations. Bhadanta Bhagavat, how much have you taught of the path of bodhisattvas, the Dharma discourse on the entranceway instruction to samādhi and the entranceway to the purity of accumulations? Bhadanta Bhagavat, what is the complete extent of the teaching on samādhi entranceways and the Dharma discourse on pure accumulations? Bhadanta Bhagavat, how should a noble son or noble daughter remain within your teaching? In what way should they be adorned by the teaching on samādhi entranceways?’


6.
Chapter 6

Conclusion

6.­1

“Noble son, I, with my buddha eyes, see in the ten directions as many bhagavat buddhas passing into parinirvāṇa as there are particles in a buddha realm. It was I who first brought them all to the aspiration for the highest, most complete enlightenment and made them enter and remain in it.

6.­2

“Thus, [F.284.a] I see innumerable, uncountable bhagavat buddhas who reside, live, and remain in the eastern direction, teaching the Dharma, having turned the Dharma wheel that possesses the Dharma. It was I who first brought them, too, to the aspiration for the highest, most complete enlightenment and made them enter and remain in it. I was the one who made them first obtain, enter, and remain in the six perfections.


c.

Colophon

c.­1

This was translated and revised by the Indian preceptors Jinamitra, Surendrabodhi, Prajñāvarman, and the chief editor Lotsawa Bendé Yeshé Dé and others.


n.

Notes

n.­1
The origin story in this sūtra for the 1,004 buddhas of our eon is one among several others. The sūtra The Good Eon (Bhadrakalpika, Toh 94) itself contains two origin stories for them (see Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2022, 2.­1 ff, and 2.C.­1019 ff.), The Secrets of the Realized Ones (Tathāgatācintya­guhya­nirdeśa, Toh 47, Degé Kangyur vol. 39, F.117.b–125.b) another, and The Teaching of Vimalakīrti (Vimala­kīrti­nirdeśa, Toh 176) yet another (see Thurman 2017, 12.­6 ff.)
n.­2
See Roberts, Peter Alan. trans., The White Lotus of the Good Dharma, Toh 113 (2018).
n.­3
Consequently, although the notion of multiple buddhas arising over time, as well as over space, is most fully developed in the Mahāyāna tradition, it is also a theme present in the texts of Nikāya Buddhism, including several in the Pali Canon and the Mahāvastu of the Lokottaravāda-Mahāsāṅghika. For a general survey of accounts of multiple buddhas, see The Good Eon i.­10–i.­18. See also Salomon 2018, pp. 265–293.
n.­4
In essence the process begins with a period in which an individual accumulates merit independently, followed by the first vow to attain awakening, made in the presence of a buddha; the subsequent prophecy of awakening, made by the same or another, later buddha; a long period of maturation during which the six (or more) perfections are practiced and the successive bodhisattva levels are traversed; the attainment of a stage of irreversible progress leading to inevitable awakening; being anointed as the next buddha to come by the preceding buddha; taking birth in the Heaven of Joy; and being reborn in the lifetime during which awakening as a tathāgata will occur. The stages of a bodhisattva’s practice are the topic of numerous scriptures, treatises, and commentaries, some in vast detail such as the Buddha­vataṃsaka­sūtra (Toh 44) and the Yogācārabhūmi (Toh 4035–4037). Perhaps the most succinct summary comes in the opening lines of the Mahāvastu, where four stages are described: (1) prakṛticaryā (“natural career”), (2) pranidhāna­caryā (“resolving stage”), (3) anulomacaryā (“conforming stage”), and (4) anivartana­caryā (“preserving career”). See Mahāvastu, vol. I, 1.2; the four stages are explained in more detail in vol. 1, ch. 5 and are a feature of other works including the Bahubuddhaka sūtras of Gandhāra. See also Jaini 2001, p. 453, and Salomon 2018, pp. 276–279.
n.­5
Taishō 158: 大乘悲分陀利經 (Dasheng beifen tuoli jing); Taishō 157: 悲華經 (Bei hua jing). A Chinese bibliography written in 730 by Zhi Seng claims that the sūtra was first translated by Dharmarakṣa (ca. 230–317), and that there was also another lost translation by Dao Gong made between 401 and 412. However, Yamada’s research shows the first attribution to have been a misunderstanding of the earlier Seng Min bibliography, which also records that the Dharmakṣema translation had been mistakenly ascribed to Dao Gong. See Yamada 1967, vol. 1, pp. 15–20.
n.­6
The opening section that features the Buddha Padmottara seems to have only a tenuous connection to the main body of the text. There are also some internal inconsistencies, such as an unexplained name change for King Araṇemin.
n.­7
Yamada 1967, 1:167–71.
n.­8
Denkarma, F.296.b.7. See also Herrmann-Pfandt 2008, p. 44, no. 78.
n.­14
There are two ways to interpret this traditional beginning of a sūtra, with such Indian masters as Kamalaśīla claiming that both are equally correct: the version used in this translation, and the alternative interpretation “Thus did I hear: At one time, the Bhagavat…” The various traditional and modern arguments for both sides are given in Galloway (1991).
n.­15
Skt. ājāneya; Tib. cang shes. The term ājāneya was primarily used for thoroughbred horses but was also applied to people in a laudatory sense.
n.­16
From this point on, the Sanskrit version of the introduction is more elaborate.
n.­33
According to the Tibetan. “The bodhisattvas arise from their samādhis” is absent in the Sanskrit.

b.

Bibliography

Selected Versions of The White Lotus of Compassion

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–9, vol. 50, pp. 345–736.

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 112, Degé Kangyur vol. 50 (mdo sde, cha), folios 129a–297a.

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Lhasa 119, Lhasa (lha sa) Kangyur vol. 52 (mdo sde, cha), folios 209b–474b.

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Sheldrima 76, Sheldrima (shel mkhar bris ma) Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, nga), folios 1b–243b.

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Stok 45, Stok Palace Kangyur vol. 55 (mdo sde, nga), folios 1a–243b.

’phags pa snying rje pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karuṇāpuṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Urga 112, Urga Kangyur vol. 50 (mdo sde, cha), folios 128a–296a.

Kangyur and Tengyur Texts

bcom ldan ’das kyi ye shes rgyas pa’i mdo sde rin po che mtha’ yas pa mthar phyin pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Niṣṭhāgatabhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta­nāma­mahāyāna-sūtra). Toh 99, Degé Kangyur vol. 47 (mdo sde, ga), folios 1b–275b. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee, 2019.

bde ba can gyi bkod pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Sukhāvatīvyūha­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 115, Degé Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, ja), folios 195b–200a. English translation in Sakya Pandita Translation Group, 2011.

dam pa’i chos pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Saddharma­puṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 113, Degé Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, ja), folios 1b–180b. English translation in Roberts 2022.

kun nas sgo’i le’u zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Samantamukha­parivarta­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 54, Degé Kangyur vol. 40 (dkon brtsegs, kha), folios 184a–195b. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee, 2020.

nam mkha’i mdzod kyis zhus pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Gaganagañja­pari­pṛcchā­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 148, Degé Kangyur vol. 57 (mdo sde, pa), folios 243a–330b.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa (Aṣṭāsāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā). Toh 12, Degé Kangyur vol. 33 (sher phyin brgyad stong pa, ka), folios 1b–286b.

snying rje chen po’i pad ma dkar po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Mahākaruṇā­puṇḍarīka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 111, Degé Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, cha), folios 56a–128b.

za ma tog bkod pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karaṇḍavyūha­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 116, Degé Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, ja), folios 200a–247b. English translation in Roberts 2013.

Denkarma (pho brang stod thang ldan [/lhan] dkar gyi chos kyi ’gyur ro cog gi dkar chag). Toh 4364, Degé Tengyur vol. 207 (sna tshogs, jo), folios 294b–310a.

Secondary Literature

Davids, T.W. Rhys & William Stede. The Pali Text’s Society’s Pali–English Dictionary. London: Pali Text Society, 1921–25.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. The Exposition on the Universal Gateway (Toh 54). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2019.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Toh 99). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2019.

Dīpaṃkarajñāna. dbu ma’i man ngag rin po che’i za ma tog kha phye ba (Ratna­karaṇḍodghāṭa­nāma­madhyamakopadeśa). Toh 3930, Degé Tengyur vol. 212 (dbu ma, ki), folios 96b1–116b7.

Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary (2 vols). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1953.

Galloway, Brian. “Thus Have I Heard: At one time…” Indo-Iranian Journal 34, no. 2 (April 1991): 87–104.

Herrmann-Pfandt, Adelheid. Die lHan kar ma: ein früher Katalog der ins Tibetische übersetzten buddhistischen Texte. Wien: Verlag der österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2008.

Jaini, Padmanabh S. “Stages in the Bodhisattva Career of the Tathāgata Maitreya,” in Sponberg and Hardacre (eds.), Maitreya, the Future Buddha, pp 54-90. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1988. Reprinted with additional material in Jaini, Padmanabh S. Collected Papers on Buddhist Studies, ch. 26. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 2001.

Mañjuśrīkīrti. ’jam dpal gyi mtshan yang dag par brjod pa’i rgya cher bshad pa (Mañjuśrī­nāma­saṃgītiṭīkā). Toh 2534, Degé Tengyur vol. 63 (rgyud, khu), folios 115b–301a7.

Mipham (Ju Mipham Gyatso, ’ju mi pham rgya mtsho). thub chog byin rlabs gter mdzod kyi rgyab chos pad+ma dkar po. In gsung ’bum/ mi pham rgya mtsho. Degé: sde dge spar khang, 195?. BDRC: WA4PD506.

Roberts, Peter Alan. trans. The White Lotus of the Good Dharma (Toh 113). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2022.

Roberts, Peter Alan. and Tulku Yeshi, trans. The Basket’s Display (Toh 116). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2013.

Sakya Pandita Translation Group, trans. The Display of the Pure Land of Sukhāvatī (Toh 115). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2011.

Salomon, Richard. The Buddhist Literature of Ancient Gandhāra: An Introduction with Selected Translations. Classics of Indian Buddhism series. Somerville: Wisdom Publications, 2018.

Yamada, Isshi. Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka (vols. 1 & 2). London: School of Oriental and African Studies, 1967.

Other Resources

Peking Tripitaka Online Search.

Sanskrit and Tamil Dictionaries.

Digital Sanskrit Buddhist Canon.

Resources for Kanjur and Tanjur Studies, Universität Wien.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Abhaya

Wylie:
  • ’jigs med
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • abhaya

The fifth of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Gaganamudra and is prophesied to become the Buddha Padmottara.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­88-89
  • g.­166
g.­2

Abhi­bhūta­guṇa­sāgara­rāja

Wylie:
  • yon tan rgya mtsho’i zil mnan rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱ་མཚོའི་ཟིལ་མནན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhi­bhūta­guṇa­sāgara­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­3

Abhigarjita

Wylie:
  • mngon par sgrogs pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་སྒྲོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhigarjita

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­4

Abhijñāguṇarāja

Wylie:
  • mngon shes yon tan rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་ཤེས་ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhi­jñāguṇa­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­5

Abhirati

Wylie:
  • mngon par dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhirati

The eastern realm where the ninth son of King Araṇemin has become the Buddha Akṣobhya, and after Akṣobhya’s nirvāṇa, where the tenth son will become the Buddha Suvarṇapuṣpa. It will be renamed Jayasoma when the eleventh son, Siṃha, becomes the Buddha Nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa there.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­172
  • 4.­182
  • 6.­5
  • 6.­39
  • g.­22
  • g.­218
  • g.­361
  • g.­561
  • g.­623
g.­6

Abhirūpa

Wylie:
  • gzugs bzang
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhirūpa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-second) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­7

Abhyudgatadhvaja

Wylie:
  • mngon ’phags rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་འཕགས་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • abhyudgatadhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­8

Abhyudgatameru

Wylie:
  • lhun po mngon ’phags
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ་མངོན་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • abhyudgatameru

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­9

Acalasthāvara

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo brtan pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བརྟན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • acalasthāvara

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Lokeśvararāja to the Buddha Ratnagarbha

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­481
g.­10

acceptance

Wylie:
  • bzod pa
Tibetan:
  • བཟོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣānti

A term also translated as “patience” and “forebearance” in this text, and in others sometimes as “receptivity”; here, often in the context of its association with dhāraṇī and samādhi, the term is probably to be understood as related to “forbearance that comes from realizing the birthlessness of phenomena” (q.v.).

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­70
  • 2.­101
  • 3.­46
  • 3.­56
  • 3.­114
  • 4.­115
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344
  • 5.­154
  • 6.­77
  • 6.­86
  • n.­221
  • g.­158
g.­11

Acintyamatiguṇa­rāja

Wylie:
  • blo gros bsam yas yon tan rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་བསམ་ཡས་ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • acintyamati­guṇa­rāja

The name of a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­36
  • 4.­13-14
g.­12

Acintyamati­jñāna­garbha

Wylie:
  • ye shes blo gros bsam yas snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་བློ་གྲོས་བསམ་ཡས་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • acintyamati­jñāna­garbha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­13

Acintyarāja

Wylie:
  • bsam yas rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་ཡས་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • acintyarāja

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­14

Acintyarocana

Wylie:
  • bsam yas rnam par snang mdzad
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་ཡས་རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • acintyarocana

The name that the bodhisattva Saṃrocana will have when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­84
  • g.­645
g.­15

Ādityasomā

Wylie:
  • nyi zla
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་ཟླ།
Sanskrit:
  • ādityasomā

The eastern realm where the sixth son of King Araṇemin will become a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­98
g.­16

aggregate

Wylie:
  • phung po
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • skandha

The five aggregates of forms, sensations, identifications, mental activities, and consciousnesses.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­53
  • 2.­78
  • 3.­55
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­330
  • 4.­384
  • 4.­413
  • 4.­544
  • 5.­55
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­118
  • g.­165
g.­17

Ajayavatī

Wylie:
  • mi ’pham
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཕམ།
Sanskrit:
  • ajayavatī

The eastern realm in which the bodhisattva Vīryasaṃcodana became a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­81
g.­18

ājīvika

Wylie:
  • ’tsho ba pa
Tibetan:
  • འཚོ་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ājīvika

A religious tradition begun by a contemporary of Śākyamuni, Makkhali Gosāla (c. 500 ʙᴄᴇ). Though prominent for some centuries, it died out during the first millennium ᴄᴇ. None of their own literature survives. They have been criticized as believing that everything is predetermined and therefore the individual is helpless to control outcomes. However, they apparently believed that an individual could actively progress to liberation through the practice of an ascetic spiritual path that prevented the development of more karma and the predetermined fate that it creates.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • 4.­535-536
  • 4.­541-542
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­66
  • 5.­69-71
  • 5.­133
  • g.­390
  • g.­505
  • g.­508
g.­19

Ājñava

Wylie:
  • shes pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ājñava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­20

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

The highest paradise in the form realm, and therefore the highest point in altitude within the universe.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­292
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­337
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­389
  • 4.­394-395
g.­21

Akṣayajñānakūṭa

Wylie:
  • ye shes mi zad brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་མི་ཟད་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣaya­jñānakūṭa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­22

Akṣobhya

Wylie:
  • mi ’khrugs pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཁྲུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣobhya

The buddha whom the bodhisattva Akṣobhya, the ninth son of King Araṇemin, is prophesied to become in the realm Abhirati. His name as a bodhisattva and buddha is the same. At the time when this sūtra appeared, he was already a well-known buddha and later become important as the head of one of the five buddha families in the higher tantras. Śākyamuni states that he can see Akṣobhya in the eastern buddha realm Abhirati.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­2
  • i.­4
  • i.­37
  • 4.­155-156
  • 4.­172-173
  • 4.­175-177
  • 4.­182
  • 4.­435
  • 6.­5
  • 6.­39
  • n.­251
  • g.­5
  • g.­33
  • g.­218
  • g.­361
  • g.­455
  • g.­623
g.­23

Akṣobhya

Wylie:
  • mi ’khrugs pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཁྲུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣobhya

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­24

Alindra

Wylie:
  • dgra dbang
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • alindra

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Vairocana and is prophesied to become the Buddha Dharmavaśavarīśvararāja.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­25

Ambara

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ།
Sanskrit:
  • ambara

The name of a previous incarnation of Śākyamuni as a cakravartin who gives away everything including parts of his body.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­124
  • 5.­127-129
  • g.­141
  • g.­257
  • g.­295
  • g.­470
  • g.­505
  • g.­516
  • g.­537
  • g.­545
g.­26

Ambara

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ།
Sanskrit:
  • ambara

The sixth son of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Vegavairocana and is prophesied to become the Buddha Dharma­vaśavartīśvara­rāja.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­95
g.­27

Amigha

Wylie:
  • gnod pa med
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་པ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • amigha

The eighth son of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Samantabhadra and is prophesied to become the Buddha Jñāna­vajra­vijṛmbhiteśvara­ketu.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­125
  • n.­237
  • g.­136
g.­28

Amitābha

Wylie:
  • ’od dpag med
  • snang ba mtha’ yas
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དཔག་མེད།
  • སྣང་བ་མཐའ་ཡས།
Sanskrit:
  • amitābha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The buddha of the western buddhafield of Sukhāvatī, where fortunate beings are reborn to make further progress toward spiritual maturity. Amitābha made his great vows to create such a realm when he was a bodhisattva called Dharmākara. In the Pure Land Buddhist tradition, popular in East Asia, aspiring to be reborn in his buddha realm is the main emphasis; in other Mahāyāna traditions, too, it is a widespread practice. For a detailed description of the realm, see The Display of the Pure Land of Sukhāvatī, Toh 115. In some tantras that make reference to the five families he is the tathāgata associated with the lotus family.

Amitābha, “Infinite Light,” is also known in many Indian Buddhist works as Amitāyus, “Infinite Life.” In both East Asian and Tibetan Buddhist traditions he is often conflated with another buddha named “Infinite Life,” Aparimitāyus, or “Infinite Life and Wisdom,”Aparimitāyurjñāna, the shorter version of whose name has also been back-translated from Tibetan into Sanskrit as Amitāyus but who presides over a realm in the zenith. For details on the relation between these buddhas and their names, see The Aparimitāyurjñāna Sūtra (1) Toh 674, i.9.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­2
  • i.­4
  • i.­13
  • i.­36-37
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­526
  • g.­29
  • g.­40
  • g.­317
  • g.­379
  • g.­500
  • g.­599
g.­29

Amitāyus

Wylie:
  • tshe dpag med
Tibetan:
  • ཚེ་དཔག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • amitāyus

The buddha in the realm of Sukhāvatī. Later and presently better known by his alternative name Amitābha, while Amitāyus is most commonly used as the short form of the Buddha Aparamitāyurjñāna’s name.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • i.­36
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­29-30
  • g.­47
  • g.­599
g.­30

Amoghadarśin

Wylie:
  • mthong ba don yod
Tibetan:
  • མཐོང་བ་དོན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • amoghadarśin

A bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8-9
g.­31

Amṛtaguṇatejarāja

Wylie:
  • yon tan bdud rtsi gzi brjid rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་བདུད་རྩི་གཟི་བརྗིད་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • amṛtaguṇatejarāja

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­32

Amṛtaśuddha

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • amṛtaśuddha

The name of King Araṇemin in the latter half of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra.

Located in 136 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­28
  • i.­31
  • i.­36
  • 3.­5-6
  • 3.­9-13
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­21-22
  • 3.­24-25
  • 3.­27-29
  • 3.­31-35
  • 3.­37
  • 3.­43
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­60
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­79
  • 3.­94
  • 3.­119-120
  • 3.­123
  • 3.­125-127
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­4-5
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­22-23
  • 4.­26-27
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­417
  • 4.­526
  • 5.­52
  • n.­6
  • n.­11
  • n.­106
  • n.­224
  • n.­254
  • n.­358
  • n.­374
  • g.­1
  • g.­5
  • g.­15
  • g.­19
  • g.­22
  • g.­24
  • g.­26
  • g.­27
  • g.­33
  • g.­35
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­41
  • g.­47
  • g.­49
  • g.­51
  • g.­53
  • g.­55
  • g.­103
  • g.­112
  • g.­131
  • g.­166
  • g.­168
  • g.­180
  • g.­185
  • g.­193
  • g.­198
  • g.­201
  • g.­214
  • g.­216
  • g.­242
  • g.­244
  • g.­279
  • g.­292
  • g.­305
  • g.­317
  • g.­324
  • g.­326
  • g.­337
  • g.­351
  • g.­353
  • g.­354
  • g.­361
  • g.­366
  • g.­375
  • g.­378
  • g.­379
  • g.­393
  • g.­403
  • g.­429
  • g.­431
  • g.­432
  • g.­433
  • g.­435
  • g.­437
  • g.­439
  • g.­440
  • g.­451
  • g.­455
  • g.­467
  • g.­495
  • g.­496
  • g.­524
  • g.­553
  • g.­561
  • g.­588
  • g.­621
  • g.­623
  • g.­633
  • g.­673
  • g.­676
  • g.­691
  • g.­740
  • g.­744
  • g.­746
  • g.­750
  • g.­751
g.­33

Anagha

Wylie:
  • sdig med
Tibetan:
  • སྡིག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anagha AO

The ninth son of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Akṣobhya and is prophesied to become buddha Akṣobhya.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­150
  • 4.­153-155
  • n.­237
g.­34

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda

The Buddha Śākyamuni’s cousin, who was his attendant for the last twenty years of his life. He was the subject of criticism and opposition from the monastic community after the Buddha’s passing, but he eventually succeeded to the position of the patriarch of Buddhism in India after the passing of the first patriarch Mahākāśyapa.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • 1.­2
  • g.­261
g.­35

Anaṅgaṇa

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs med
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anaṅgaṇa

The fourth of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin. He becomes the bodhisattva Vajraccheda­prajñā­vabhāsaśrī and is prophesied to become the Buddha Samantabhadra.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­77
  • g.­673
g.­36

Ananta­guṇa­sāgarajñānottara

Wylie:
  • yon tan rgya mtsho’i mtha’ yas ye shes bla ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱ་མཚོའི་མཐའ་ཡས་ཡེ་ཤེས་བླ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • ananta­guṇa­sāgarajñānottara

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­37

Anantaraśmi

Wylie:
  • ’od zer mtha’ yas
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་མཐའ་ཡས།
Sanskrit:
  • anantaraśmi

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­38

Aṅgaja

Wylie:
  • yan lag skyes
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgaja

The seventh of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin who becomes the bodhisattva Siṃhagandha and is prophesied to become the Buddha Prabhāsavirarajaḥsamucchrayagandheśvararāja.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­118
  • n.­110
g.­39

Aṅguṣṭhā

Wylie:
  • mthe bo can
Tibetan:
  • མཐེ་བོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅguṣṭhā

A realm in which the beings are only the height of a thumb, and the buddha there, Jyotīrasa, is seven thumbs in size.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­514
  • 4.­517
  • g.­256
  • g.­309
g.­40

Animiṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi ’dzums
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་འཛུམས།
Sanskrit:
  • animiṣa

The crown prince of King Araṇemin who becomes, in that lifetime, the bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara, and who is prophesied to succeed the Buddha Amitābha in Sukhāvatī as the Buddha Samantaraśmyabhyudgataśrīkūṭarāja.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­28
  • i.­37
  • 3.­29
  • 3.­31-32
  • 3.­65-66
  • 3.­120
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­32
  • n.­106
  • n.­178
  • n.­180
  • n.­398
g.­41

Animiṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi ’dzums
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་འཛུམས།
Sanskrit:
  • animiṣa

The name of the eastern realm in which the fourth son of King Araṇemin is prophesied to become the Buddha Samantabhadra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­79
g.­42

Aparā

Wylie:
  • rtsibs
Tibetan:
  • རྩིབས།
Sanskrit:
  • aparā

After Raśmi has passed into parinirvāṇa and his Dharma has come to an end, the buddha realm Virati will be named Aparā. The Tathāgata Ratneśvaraghoṣa will reside in this buddha realm and give teachings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­14
g.­43

Aparājita

Wylie:
  • gzhan gyis mi thub pa
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་གྱིས་མི་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aparājita

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-first) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­44

apsaras

Wylie:
  • lha mo
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • apsaras

A class of celestial female beings known for their great beauty.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­161
g.­45

Arajamerujugupsita

Wylie:
  • rdul med lhun po spos
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་མེད་ལྷུན་པོ་སྤོས།
Sanskrit:
  • arajamerujugupsita

A name of the Sahā realm in an earlier eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­93
  • 5.­106
  • g.­169
g.­46

Arajavairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed rdul bral
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད་རྡུལ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • arajavairocana

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Vigata­bhaya­paryutthāna­ghoṣa to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­482
g.­47

Araṇemin

Wylie:
  • rtsibs kyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • རྩིབས་ཀྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • araṇemin

The name of the king in the distant past who eventually became Amitāyus. Later he is named Amṛtaśuddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­32
g.­48

Aratīya

Wylie:
  • dga’ med
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • aratīya

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­49

Arava

Wylie:
  • rtsibs can
Tibetan:
  • རྩིབས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • arava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­50

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to Buddhist tradition, one who is worthy of worship (pūjām arhati), or one who has conquered the enemies, the mental afflictions (kleśa-ari-hata-vat), and reached liberation from the cycle of rebirth and suffering. It is the fourth and highest of the four fruits attainable by śrāvakas. Also used as an epithet of the Buddha.

Located in 89 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8-10
  • 1.­19-23
  • 1.­25-26
  • 2.­17-18
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­46-48
  • 2.­51
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­90
  • 2.­92
  • 3.­8-9
  • 3.­11-13
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­33-34
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­123-124
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­10-11
  • 4.­13-15
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­71
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­121
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­146
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­415
  • 4.­462
  • 4.­469
  • 4.­474
  • 4.­479
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­492
  • 4.­504
  • 4.­514-515
  • 4.­544
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­50
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­82-85
  • 6.­11
  • n.­117
  • g.­153
  • g.­576
g.­51

Arthabahu

Wylie:
  • nor mang
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་མང་།
Sanskrit:
  • arthabahu

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­52

Arthadarśin

Wylie:
  • don mthong
Tibetan:
  • དོན་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • arthadarśin

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-ninth) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­53

Aśaja

Wylie:
  • yan lag skyes
  • yang dag skyes
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་སྐྱེས།
  • ཡང་དག་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • aśaja

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­54

Asamantara­meru­svara­vighuṣṭa­rāja

Wylie:
  • lhun po phrag med pa sgra dbyangs rnam par grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ་ཕྲག་མེད་པ་སྒྲ་དབྱངས་རྣམ་པར་གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • asamantara­meru­svara­vighuṣṭa­rāja

A buddha whom Śākyamuni sees in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­55

Asaṅga

Wylie:
  • chags med
  • chabs med
Tibetan:
  • ཆགས་མེད།
  • ཆབས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṅga

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­56

Asaṅgabalarāja

Wylie:
  • thogs med stobs spos kyi rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཐོགས་མེད་སྟོབས་སྤོས་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṅgabalarāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­57

Asaṅgahiteṣin

Wylie:
  • chags med phan bzhed
Tibetan:
  • ཆགས་མེད་ཕན་བཞེད།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṅgahiteṣin

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­58

Aśokaśrī

Wylie:
  • mya ngan med pa’i dpal
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་མེད་པའི་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśokaśrī

A buddha whom Śākyamuni sees in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­42
g.­59

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • i.­27
  • i.­33
  • i.­48
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­89
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­98-99
  • 3.­105-107
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­413
  • 4.­416
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­486
  • 4.­533-534
  • 4.­540
  • 4.­550
  • 4.­556
  • 5.­57
  • 5.­66
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­103
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­91
  • g.­155
  • g.­261
g.­60

Āśvasta

Wylie:
  • dbugs ’byin
Tibetan:
  • དབུགས་འབྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • āśvasta

A bodhisattva ṛṣi living on the island of jewels at the time of the Buddha’s previous life as the cakravartin Pradīpapradyota.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­114
g.­61

Avalokiteśvara

Wylie:
  • spyan ras gzigs dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • avalokiteśvara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the “eight close sons of the Buddha,” he is also known as the bodhisattva who embodies compassion. In certain tantras, he is also the lord of the three families, where he embodies the compassion of the buddhas. In Tibet, he attained great significance as a special protector of Tibet, and in China, in female form, as Guanyin, the most important bodhisattva in all of East Asia.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­2
  • i.­9
  • i.­13
  • i.­37
  • 4.­32-35
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­419
  • n.­178
  • n.­180-181
  • g.­40
  • g.­500
  • g.­546
g.­62

Āvetuka

Wylie:
  • ’khyil byed
Tibetan:
  • འཁྱིལ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āvetuka

A deva who made offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­90
g.­63

Avīci

Wylie:
  • mnar med
Tibetan:
  • མནར་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • avīci

The lowest hell, the eighth of the eight hot hells.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­281
  • 4.­319
  • 4.­408
  • 4.­410
  • 4.­412
  • 4.­537-538
  • 5.­106
g.­64

Balagarbha

Wylie:
  • stobs kyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཀྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • balagarbha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­65

Balasandarśana

Wylie:
  • stobs yang dag par ston pa
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཡང་དག་པར་སྟོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • balasandarśana

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­457
g.­66

Baliṣṭhā

Wylie:
  • mchog
Tibetan:
  • མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • baliṣṭhā

The realm in which the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that Samudrareṇu’s oldest son will become the Buddha Ratnaketu, and that subsequently Samudrareṇu’s second son, Saṃbhava, will become the Buddha Vairocanakusuma.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­197
  • 4.­202
  • g.­661
g.­67

bases of miraculous powers

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul gyi rkang pa
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་རྐང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛddhipāda

Determination, diligence, intention, and examination.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­214
  • 4.­379
  • 5.­29
  • 5.­48
g.­68

bhadanta

Wylie:
  • btsun pa
Tibetan:
  • བཙུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadanta

“Venerable One.” A term of respect used for Buddhist monks.

Located in 103 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­22
  • 2.­49
  • 2.­55
  • 2.­73
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­62
  • 3.­123
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­9
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­60
  • 4.­62
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­87-88
  • 4.­96-97
  • 4.­118
  • 4.­125-126
  • 4.­129-132
  • 4.­134-135
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­150-153
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­165
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­176
  • 4.­178
  • 4.­183
  • 4.­196
  • 4.­198
  • 4.­205
  • 4.­207
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­235
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­247
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­280-281
  • 4.­283
  • 4.­305-307
  • 4.­309-310
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­357
  • 4.­359
  • 4.­362
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­393-394
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­408
  • 4.­415
  • 4.­463
  • 4.­468
  • 4.­474
  • 4.­479-481
  • 4.­483
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­492
  • 4.­500
  • 4.­537-538
  • 4.­543
  • 4.­547-549
  • 4.­552-553
  • 5.­1
  • 6.­10-13
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­53
  • 6.­59
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­82
  • 6.­84
  • 6.­90
g.­69

Bhadraka

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadraka

Our present eon in which over a thousand buddhas will appear. The meaning is “good” because of the number of buddhas that will appear. In this sūtra it is usually called bhadraka.

Located in 59 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­233
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­240-241
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­255
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­268-273
  • 4.­276-278
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­307
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­332
  • 4.­396
  • 4.­399
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­415
  • 4.­432
  • 4.­522
  • 4.­525-526
  • n.­278-279
  • n.­285
  • g.­74
  • g.­142
  • g.­191
  • g.­207
  • g.­254
  • g.­268
  • g.­271
  • g.­275
  • g.­289
  • g.­307
  • g.­323
  • g.­405
  • g.­422
  • g.­469
  • g.­536
  • g.­541
  • g.­558
  • g.­562
  • g.­587
  • g.­600
  • g.­647
  • g.­690
  • g.­712
  • g.­730
  • g.­731
g.­70

Bhadravairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed bzang po
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadra­vairocana

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Jitendriya­viśāla­netra to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­480
g.­71

Bhadrottama

Wylie:
  • bzang mchog
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrottama

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­72

Bhagavat

Wylie:
  • bcom ldan ’das
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhagavat

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhist literature, this is an epithet applied to buddhas, most often to Śākyamuni. The Sanskrit term generally means “possessing fortune,” but in specifically Buddhist contexts it implies that a buddha is in possession of six auspicious qualities (bhaga) associated with complete awakening. The Tibetan term‍—where bcom is said to refer to “subduing” the four māras, ldan to “possessing” the great qualities of buddhahood, and ’das to “going beyond” saṃsāra and nirvāṇa‍—possibly reflects the commentarial tradition where the Sanskrit bhagavat is interpreted, in addition, as “one who destroys the four māras.” This is achieved either by reading bhagavat as bhagnavat (“one who broke”), or by tracing the word bhaga to the root √bhañj (“to break”).

Located in 356 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­9-12
  • 1.­21-22
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­14-15
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­34-39
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­48-49
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­55-56
  • 2.­68
  • 2.­70
  • 2.­73
  • 2.­76-79
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­90
  • 2.­93-94
  • 2.­98-99
  • 2.­101
  • 3.­1-5
  • 3.­7
  • 3.­12-13
  • 3.­15-16
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­20-22
  • 3.­25-29
  • 3.­31-34
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­41-44
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­53
  • 3.­55-56
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­60-64
  • 3.­66-67
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­77
  • 3.­81-83
  • 3.­89-94
  • 3.­96-97
  • 3.­99-104
  • 3.­106-111
  • 3.­114-115
  • 3.­117
  • 3.­123-128
  • 4.­2-3
  • 4.­5-6
  • 4.­9
  • 4.­16-17
  • 4.­19-21
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­27-29
  • 4.­31
  • 4.­34-36
  • 4.­39-43
  • 4.­46-47
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­52
  • 4.­57
  • 4.­60
  • 4.­62
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­69
  • 4.­73-75
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­84
  • 4.­87-88
  • 4.­90
  • 4.­92-93
  • 4.­96-99
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­107
  • 4.­114
  • 4.­117-118
  • 4.­120
  • 4.­125-127
  • 4.­129-137
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­150-154
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­165
  • 4.­172-173
  • 4.­176-178
  • 4.­182-183
  • 4.­196-198
  • 4.­202-203
  • 4.­205-207
  • 4.­211
  • 4.­215
  • 4.­218-219
  • 4.­221
  • 4.­228-230
  • 4.­232-233
  • 4.­235-237
  • 4.­240-241
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­247
  • 4.­255-256
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­270-271
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­280-283
  • 4.­287-288
  • 4.­290
  • 4.­292
  • 4.­305-307
  • 4.­309-311
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­325-326
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­357
  • 4.­359
  • 4.­362
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­393-394
  • 4.­398
  • 4.­400
  • 4.­403-405
  • 4.­407-408
  • 4.­410
  • 4.­414-416
  • 4.­461
  • 4.­463-464
  • 4.­467-468
  • 4.­473-474
  • 4.­477
  • 4.­479-481
  • 4.­483-484
  • 4.­486-487
  • 4.­491-492
  • 4.­497
  • 4.­500
  • 4.­517-519
  • 4.­524-525
  • 4.­537-538
  • 4.­543-544
  • 4.­546-549
  • 4.­552-553
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­77
  • 5.­82-86
  • 5.­92
  • 5.­106
  • 5.­158
  • 6.­1-2
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­6-8
  • 6.­10-13
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­22-24
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­41-42
  • 6.­44
  • 6.­46-47
  • 6.­49
  • 6.­53
  • 6.­59
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­63
  • 6.­66
  • 6.­69
  • 6.­73
  • 6.­77
  • 6.­80-85
  • 6.­88-91
  • n.­14
  • n.­64
  • n.­106
  • n.­122
  • n.­149
g.­73

Bhairavatī

Wylie:
  • ’jigs ldan
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhairavatī

The western realm in which the bodhisattva Prajñārciḥ­saṃkopita­daṣṭa became the Buddha Sūrya­garbhārci­vimalendra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­83
g.­74

Bhaiṣajya­rāja­jyotirvi­mala

Wylie:
  • sman gyi rgyal po skar ma dri ma med
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་གྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ་སྐར་མ་དྲི་མ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaiṣajya­rāja­jyotirvimala

The bodhisattva name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha gives to Mahābalavegadhārin, the youngest of the Veda-reciting pupils of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Roca, the thousand and fifth and the last buddha in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­282-285
  • g.­307
g.­75

bhikṣu

Wylie:
  • dge slong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣu

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣu, often translated as “monk,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist monks and nuns‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity.

In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a monk follows 253 rules as part of his moral discipline. A nun (bhikṣuṇī; dge slong ma) follows 364 rules. A novice monk (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or nun (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma) follows thirty-six rules of moral discipline (although in other vinaya traditions novices typically follow only ten).

Located in 62 passages in the translation:

  • i.­28
  • i.­52
  • 1.­2
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79
  • 3.­12-13
  • 3.­20-22
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­27-29
  • 3.­31-34
  • 3.­41-43
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­67
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­82-83
  • 3.­89
  • 3.­92-94
  • 3.­96-97
  • 3.­101
  • 3.­103-104
  • 3.­107
  • 3.­114-115
  • 3.­117
  • 3.­124
  • 3.­126-127
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­266-268
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­525
  • 4.­545-546
  • 5.­55
  • 6.­87
  • n.­106
g.­76

bhikṣuṇī

Wylie:
  • dge slong ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣuṇī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣuṇī, often translated as “nun,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term bhikṣu (to which the female grammatical ending ṇī is added) literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist nuns and monks‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity. In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a bhikṣuṇī follows 364 rules and a bhikṣu follows 253 rules as part of their moral discipline.

For the first few years of the Buddha’s teachings in India, there was no ordination for women. It started at the persistent request and display of determination of Mahāprajāpatī, the Buddha’s stepmother and aunt, together with five hundred former wives of men of Kapilavastu, who had themselves become monks. Mahāprajāpatī is thus considered to be the founder of the nun’s order.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­79
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­545-546
g.­77

bhūmi

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūmi

A level of enlightenment; typically the ten levels of a bodhisattva’s development into a fully enlightened buddha.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­42-43
  • 2.­50
  • 2.­69
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344
  • 4.­369
  • n.­315
  • g.­158
g.­78

bhūta

Wylie:
  • byung po
Tibetan:
  • བྱུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term in its broadest sense can refer to any being, whether human, animal, or nonhuman. However, it is often used to refer to a specific class of nonhuman beings, especially when bhūtas are mentioned alongside rākṣasas, piśācas, or pretas. In common with these other kinds of nonhumans, bhūtas are usually depicted with unattractive and misshapen bodies. Like several other classes of nonhuman beings, bhūtas take spontaneous birth. As their leader is traditionally regarded to be Rudra-Śiva (also known by the name Bhūta), with whom they haunt dangerous and wild places, bhūtas are especially prominent in Śaivism, where large sections of certain tantras concentrate on them.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­69
  • 5.­120
  • n.­426
g.­79

bodhicitta

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhicitta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the general Mahāyāna teachings the mind of awakening (bodhicitta) is the intention to attain the complete awakening of a perfect buddha for the sake of all beings. On the level of absolute truth, the mind of awakening is the realization of the awakened state itself.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­2
  • 4.­262
  • g.­302
g.­80

bodhisattva

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhisattva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A being who is dedicated to the cultivation and fulfilment of the altruistic intention to attain perfect buddhahood, traversing the ten bodhisattva levels (daśabhūmi, sa bcu). Bodhisattvas purposely opt to remain within cyclic existence in order to liberate all sentient beings, instead of simply seeking personal freedom from suffering. In terms of the view, they realize both the selflessness of persons and the selflessness of phenomena.

Located in 523 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-3
  • i.­7-9
  • i.­13
  • i.­23-28
  • i.­35
  • i.­37
  • i.­39-41
  • i.­45-47
  • i.­49-50
  • i.­57-59
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­7-13
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­17
  • 1.­20-26
  • 2.­1-5
  • 2.­7-8
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­35-40
  • 2.­42-71
  • 2.­73
  • 2.­76-79
  • 2.­90-92
  • 2.­101
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­3-4
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­57-58
  • 3.­60-61
  • 4.­2-3
  • 4.­5-7
  • 4.­16-18
  • 4.­28-30
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­47-50
  • 4.­52-57
  • 4.­59-62
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­67-68
  • 4.­72-74
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­92-93
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­104-105
  • 4.­109
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­122
  • 4.­125-127
  • 4.­131
  • 4.­134
  • 4.­138
  • 4.­140-141
  • 4.­150-151
  • 4.­153-154
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­170
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­179
  • 4.­183-185
  • 4.­187
  • 4.­195
  • 4.­213-214
  • 4.­222
  • 4.­227
  • 4.­230
  • 4.­234
  • 4.­242
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­248-254
  • 4.­270
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­280
  • 4.­283-285
  • 4.­287-288
  • 4.­309-310
  • 4.­312-313
  • 4.­317-318
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­376-377
  • 4.­380
  • 4.­398-399
  • 4.­423
  • 4.­425
  • 4.­427
  • 4.­429
  • 4.­433
  • 4.­452
  • 4.­457
  • 4.­461-469
  • 4.­471
  • 4.­474
  • 4.­476-489
  • 4.­492
  • 4.­494-497
  • 4.­499
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­517
  • 4.­520-523
  • 4.­527-529
  • 4.­533
  • 4.­535
  • 4.­537
  • 4.­539
  • 4.­541-544
  • 4.­547
  • 4.­554-557
  • 5.­1-47
  • 5.­49-51
  • 5.­53-54
  • 5.­56-57
  • 5.­79
  • 5.­81-83
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­114
  • 5.­123
  • 5.­146
  • 5.­154
  • 5.­158
  • 6.­7-8
  • 6.­10-16
  • 6.­19-21
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­36-37
  • 6.­39-40
  • 6.­45
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­49
  • 6.­51-53
  • 6.­56
  • 6.­58
  • 6.­60
  • 6.­62-63
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­72-73
  • 6.­77-78
  • 6.­82
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­88-90
  • n.­4
  • n.­30
  • n.­33
  • n.­51
  • n.­54
  • n.­56
  • n.­68
  • n.­78
  • n.­143
  • n.­145-146
  • n.­169
  • n.­178
  • n.­180
  • n.­190
  • n.­209
  • n.­229
  • n.­237
  • n.­251
  • n.­272
  • n.­283
  • n.­315
  • n.­325
  • n.­327
  • n.­358
  • n.­373-374
  • n.­389
  • n.­393
  • n.­394
  • n.­419
  • n.­447
  • n.­460
  • g.­1
  • g.­9
  • g.­14
  • g.­17
  • g.­22
  • g.­24
  • g.­26
  • g.­27
  • g.­30
  • g.­33
  • g.­35
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­46
  • g.­60
  • g.­61
  • g.­65
  • g.­70
  • g.­73
  • g.­74
  • g.­77
  • g.­97
  • g.­102
  • g.­120
  • g.­121
  • g.­122
  • g.­158
  • g.­166
  • g.­168
  • g.­193
  • g.­198
  • g.­223
  • g.­229
  • g.­242
  • g.­243
  • g.­244
  • g.­245
  • g.­258
  • g.­293
  • g.­303
  • g.­307
  • g.­309
  • g.­310
  • g.­316
  • g.­317
  • g.­323
  • g.­330
  • g.­335
  • g.­347
  • g.­348
  • g.­379
  • g.­386
  • g.­387
  • g.­406
  • g.­408
  • g.­409
  • g.­414
  • g.­430
  • g.­455
  • g.­456
  • g.­462
  • g.­477
  • g.­480
  • g.­481
  • g.­489
  • g.­490
  • g.­494
  • g.­495
  • g.­497
  • g.­509
  • g.­513
  • g.­514
  • g.­533
  • g.­538
  • g.­539
  • g.­543
  • g.­561
  • g.­563
  • g.­566
  • g.­568
  • g.­569
  • g.­571
  • g.­593
  • g.­612
  • g.­617
  • g.­631
  • g.­632
  • g.­645
  • g.­659
  • g.­660
  • g.­666
  • g.­668
  • g.­669
  • g.­670
  • g.­673
  • g.­685
  • g.­691
  • g.­693
  • g.­695
  • g.­700
  • g.­702
  • g.­707
  • g.­711
  • g.­713
  • g.­726
  • g.­731
g.­81

Brahma

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­82

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A high-ranking deity presiding over a divine world; he is also considered to be the lord of the Sahā world (our universe). Though not considered a creator god in Buddhism, Brahmā occupies an important place as one of two gods (the other being Indra/Śakra) said to have first exhorted the Buddha Śākyamuni to teach the Dharma. The particular heavens found in the form realm over which Brahmā rules are often some of the most sought-after realms of higher rebirth in Buddhist literature. Since there are many universes or world systems, there are also multiple Brahmās presiding over them. His most frequent epithets are “Lord of the Sahā World” (sahāṃpati) and Great Brahmā (mahābrahman).

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • i.­30
  • i.­33-34
  • i.­48
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­8
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­40-41
  • 3.­44-45
  • 3.­101
  • 3.­105-108
  • 3.­124
  • 3.­129
  • 4.­44
  • 4.­48
  • 4.­294
  • 4.­298
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­358
  • 4.­502
  • 4.­509
  • 4.­527
  • 5.­102
  • 5.­120
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­85
  • n.­115
  • n.­127
  • n.­375
  • g.­87
  • g.­281
g.­83

brahmacarya

Wylie:
  • tshangs par spyod pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པར་སྤྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmacārya

A celibate lifestyle focused on spiritual pursuits.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­84

Brahmakusuma

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakusuma

A buddha whom Śākyamuni sees in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­85

Brahmarṣabha

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa khyu mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་ཁྱུ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • brahmarṣabha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-sixth) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­86

Brahmasvara

Wylie:
  • tshangs dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmasvara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­87

brahmavihāra

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmavihāra

The four brahmaviharas are limitless love, compassion, rejoicing, and impartiality. Meditation on these alone is said to bring rebirth in the Brahmā realms.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­250
  • 4.­374
  • 5.­115
  • 5.­118
  • 6.­90
g.­88

Brahmendraghoṣa

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i dbang po dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་དབང་པོ་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmendra­ghoṣa

A buddha whom Śākyamuni sees in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­89

brahmin

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A member of the highest of the four castes in Indian society, which is closely associated with religious vocations.

Located in 192 passages in the translation:

  • i.­28
  • i.­39-40
  • i.­42-43
  • i.­53-54
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­34-36
  • 3.­40-42
  • 3.­44-49
  • 3.­51-52
  • 3.­54-56
  • 3.­59
  • 3.­65
  • 3.­68
  • 3.­71-82
  • 3.­84-90
  • 3.­92-94
  • 3.­98-99
  • 3.­101-102
  • 3.­108-109
  • 3.­116-118
  • 3.­123-124
  • 3.­127-128
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­19-20
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­125
  • 4.­150
  • 4.­176
  • 4.­181
  • 4.­191-192
  • 4.­195-197
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­202
  • 4.­205-206
  • 4.­208
  • 4.­210-218
  • 4.­221
  • 4.­224-226
  • 4.­230
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­235-237
  • 4.­240-241
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­264-265
  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269-273
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­286-287
  • 4.­289
  • 4.­292-293
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­306
  • 4.­308-309
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­328
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­417
  • 4.­457
  • 4.­459-460
  • 4.­476-478
  • 4.­496-497
  • 4.­500
  • 4.­503-505
  • 4.­508
  • 4.­510
  • 4.­519
  • 4.­522-523
  • 4.­535-536
  • 5.­118
  • 5.­129-132
  • 6.­85
  • n.­272
  • n.­285
  • n.­375
  • g.­65
  • g.­74
  • g.­121
  • g.­141
  • g.­207
  • g.­229
  • g.­257
  • g.­271
  • g.­307
  • g.­310
  • g.­428
  • g.­469
  • g.­470
  • g.­475
  • g.­502
  • g.­520
  • g.­522
  • g.­524
  • g.­525
  • g.­536
  • g.­537
  • g.­587
  • g.­619
  • g.­659
  • g.­660
  • g.­689
  • g.­690
  • g.­693
  • g.­713
g.­90

Brahmottara

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa mchog
  • tshangs mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་མཆོག
  • ཚངས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • brahmottara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­91

Brahmottara

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa mchog
  • tshangs mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་མཆོག
  • ཚངས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • brahmottara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­92

Buddhaśrava

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddhaśrava

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twentieth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­93

Cakravāḍa

Wylie:
  • khor yug
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ཡུག
Sanskrit:
  • cakravāḍa

Literally, “circular mass.” There are at least three interpretations of what this name refers to. In the Kṣitigarbha Sūtra, it is a mountain that contains the hells. In that case it is equivalent to the Vaḍaba submarine mountain of fire, also said to be the entrance to the hells. More commonly it is the name of the outer ring of mountains at the edge of the flat disk that is the world, with Sumeru in the center. This is also equated with Vaḍaba, the heat of which evaporates the ocean so that it does not overflow. Jambudvīpa, the world of humans, is in this sea to Sumeru’s south. However, it is also used to mean the entire disk, including Meru and the paradises above it. The Tibetan here is just ’khor yug, but later on it is ’khor yug gi ri, which means the circle of mountains around the world.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­34
  • 3.­119
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­101
  • 5.­105
  • 6.­65
g.­94

cakravartin

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­28
  • i.­52-54
  • 3.­5
  • 3.­8
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­41
  • 4.­107
  • 4.­334
  • 5.­56
  • 5.­62
  • 5.­67
  • 5.­73-74
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­109
  • 5.­124
  • 5.­129
  • n.­90
  • n.­115
  • g.­25
  • g.­60
  • g.­101
  • g.­111
  • g.­144
  • g.­323
  • g.­404
  • g.­423
  • g.­510
  • g.­516
  • g.­545
g.­95

caṇḍāla

Wylie:
  • gdol pa
Tibetan:
  • གདོལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍāla

One of the lower social classes that are outside, and beneath, the four castes.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­50
  • 4.­133
  • 5.­58
  • 5.­60-61
  • 5.­73-74
  • g.­423
  • g.­510
g.­96

Candana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­97

Candana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana

The name of a buddha in a northeastern realm that sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­98

Candanā

Wylie:
  • tsan dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན།
Sanskrit:
  • candanā

The distant southeastern realm of the Buddha Candrottama long ago in the past, which became Padmā in the time of the next Buddha, Padmottara.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­24
  • 2.­19-20
  • 2.­47
g.­99

Candanamūla

Wylie:
  • tsan dan gyi rtsa ba
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་གྱི་རྩ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candanamūla

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­100

Candra

Wylie:
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candra

The deity of the moon. He represents the northeast direction.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­321
  • 4.­341
  • 6.­14
g.­101

Candra

Wylie:
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candra

The name of the head merchant in the story of Śākyamuni’s previous life as cakravartin Pradīpapradyota.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­114
g.­102

Candraketu

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i tog
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • candraketu

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Ratnacandra to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­463
  • 4.­476
g.­103

Candranemin

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • candranemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­104

Candravidyuta

Wylie:
  • zla ba rnam par snang ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ་རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candravidyuta

A name of the Sahā realm in an earlier eon.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­109
g.­105

candravimalā

Wylie:
  • zla ba dri med
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ་དྲི་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • candravimalā

Unidentified flower.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­389
g.­106

Candrottama

Wylie:
  • zla ba dam pa
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • candrottama

The buddha preceding the Buddha Padmottara in a distant southeastern buddha realm.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­24
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­46-48
  • 2.­50-51
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­72
  • n.­65
  • g.­98
g.­107

Cāritra­caraṇa­sudarśayūthika

Wylie:
  • spyad spyod lta mdzes
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱད་སྤྱོད་ལྟ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • cāritra­caraṇa­sudarśayūthika

A śakra deity who prays to be Samudrareṇu’s son when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Rahula.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­531
g.­108

Catura

Wylie:
  • grims g.yar
Tibetan:
  • གྲིམས་གཡར།
Sanskrit:
  • catura

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­109

clairvoyance

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhijñā

There are usually six clairvoyances: divine sight, divine hearing, knowing how to manifest miracles, remembering previous lives, knowing what is in the minds of others, and knowing that all defects have been eliminated.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • i.­53
  • 2.­6
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­250
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­371
  • 4.­373
  • 4.­376-377
  • 4.­498
  • 5.­55
  • 5.­113
  • 5.­118
  • 5.­154
  • 5.­158
  • n.­439
g.­110

coral tree

Wylie:
  • man dA ra ba
Tibetan:
  • མན་དཱ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • māndārava

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five trees of Indra’s paradise, its heavenly flowers often rain down in salutation of the buddhas and bodhisattvas and are said to be very bright and aromatic, gladdening the hearts of those who see them. In our world, it is a tree native to India, Erythrina indica or Erythrina variegata, commonly known as the Indian coral tree, mandarava tree, flame tree, and tiger’s claw. In the early spring, before its leaves grow, the tree is fully covered in large flowers, which are rich in nectar and attract many birds. Although the most widespread coral tree has red crimson flowers, the color of the blossoms is not usually mentioned in the sūtras themselves, and it may refer to some other kinds, like the rarer Erythrina indica alba, which boasts white flowers.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­97
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­73-74
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­389
  • 4.­394
  • 4.­460
  • g.­182
g.­111

Dagapāla

Wylie:
  • chu skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dagapāla

The mountain that the cakravartin Durdhana, a previous life of Śākyamuni, leaps from in order to make a gift of his body.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­100
  • 5.­104
g.­112

Dāmacitra

Wylie:
  • chun po sna tshogs
Tibetan:
  • ཆུན་པོ་སྣ་ཚོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dāmacitra

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­113

dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītyasamut­pāda

The relative nature of phenomena, which arises in dependence upon causes and conditions. Together with the four noble truths, this was the first teaching given by the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­366
  • 4.­390
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­118
  • g.­418
g.­114

Deva

Wylie:
  • lha
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • deva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the most general sense the devas‍—the term is cognate with the English divine‍—are a class of celestial beings who frequently appear in Buddhist texts, often at the head of the assemblies of nonhuman beings who attend and celebrate the teachings of the Buddha Śākyamuni and other buddhas and bodhisattvas. In Buddhist cosmology the devas occupy the highest of the five or six “destinies” (gati) of saṃsāra among which beings take rebirth. The devas reside in the devalokas, “heavens” that traditionally number between twenty-six and twenty-eight and are divided between the desire realm (kāmadhātu), form realm (rūpadhātu), and formless realm (ārūpyadhātu). A being attains rebirth among the devas either through meritorious deeds (in the desire realm) or the attainment of subtle meditative states (in the form and formless realms). While rebirth among the devas is considered favorable, it is ultimately a transitory state from which beings will fall when the conditions that lead to rebirth there are exhausted. Thus, rebirth in the god realms is regarded as a diversion from the spiritual path.

Located in 118 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • i.­27
  • i.­33
  • 1.­3-5
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­26
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­54
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­83
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­96
  • 2.­101
  • 3.­7
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­50
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­56
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­88
  • 3.­90-97
  • 3.­101-104
  • 3.­107
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­117
  • 3.­119
  • 3.­121
  • 3.­125
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­44
  • 4.­48
  • 4.­81-82
  • 4.­113
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­156-158
  • 4.­160-161
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­289
  • 4.­292
  • 4.­296
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­306
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­327
  • 4.­329
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­391-392
  • 4.­405-406
  • 4.­416
  • 4.­459
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­486
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­534
  • 4.­540
  • 4.­549-550
  • 4.­556
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­101-105
  • 5.­114
  • 5.­120-121
  • 5.­127
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­81
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­91
  • n.­115
  • n.­119
  • n.­421
  • n.­423
  • n.­426
  • n.­428
  • g.­59
  • g.­62
  • g.­197
  • g.­288
  • g.­329
  • g.­471
  • g.­485
  • g.­545
  • g.­692
g.­115

Devasoma

Wylie:
  • lha’i zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • devasoma

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­116

Devaśuddha

Wylie:
  • dag pa’i lha
Tibetan:
  • དག་པའི་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • devaśuddha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-second) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­117

Dhāraṇa

Wylie:
  • ’dzin pa
Tibetan:
  • འཛིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇa

The name of an eon in the distant past where most of the events in The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra take place.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­5
  • 4.­23
g.­118

Dharaṇāvatī

Wylie:
  • sa can
Tibetan:
  • ས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharaṇāvatī

An eastern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­119

dhāraṇī

Wylie:
  • gzungs
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term dhāraṇī has the sense of something that “holds” or “retains,” and so it can refer to the special capacity of practitioners to memorize and recall detailed teachings. It can also refer to a verbal expression of the teachings‍—an incantation, spell, or mnemonic formula‍—that distills and “holds” essential points of the Dharma and is used by practitioners to attain mundane and supramundane goals. The same term is also used to denote texts that contain such formulas.

Located in 67 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • i.­18
  • i.­24-26
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­28
  • 2.­34-48
  • 2.­50
  • 2.­52
  • 2.­54-58
  • 2.­63-64
  • 2.­67-73
  • 2.­75-76
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­101-102
  • 3.­46
  • 3.­56
  • 3.­114
  • 4.­6-7
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­420
  • 4.­464
  • 4.­484
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­24
  • 5.­154
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­77
  • 6.­86
  • n.­51
  • n.­67
  • g.­10
g.­120

Dharaṇidatta

Wylie:
  • sas byin
Tibetan:
  • སས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharaṇidatta

One of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal the Buddha Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­80
  • 5.­92
  • g.­509
  • g.­543
g.­121

Dharaṇīmudra

Wylie:
  • gzungs kyi phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས་ཀྱི་ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharaṇīmudra

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu but is not mentioned elsewhere in the sūtra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­447
g.­122

Dhāraṇī­saṃpraharṣaṇa­vikopita

Wylie:
  • gzungs kyis yang dag par rab tu dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས་ཀྱིས་ཡང་དག་པར་རབ་ཏུ་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇī­saṃpraharṣaṇavikopita

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Prasphulitakusuma­vairocana to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­483
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­494
g.­123

Dharma reciter

Wylie:
  • chos smra ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྨྲ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmabhāṇaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Speaker or reciter of scriptures. In early Buddhism a section of the saṅgha would consist of bhāṇakas, who, particularly before the teachings were written down and were only transmitted orally, were a key factor in the preservation of the teachings. Various groups of dharmabhāṇakas specialized in memorizing and reciting a certain set of sūtras or vinaya.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­44
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­388
  • n.­60
g.­124

Dharmacandra

Wylie:
  • chos kyi zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmacandra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­125

Dharmadhvaja

Wylie:
  • chos kyi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­126

Dharma­kārisāla­rāja

Wylie:
  • chos byed dang sA la’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་བྱེད་དང་སཱ་ལའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­kārisāla­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­127

Dharmaketu

Wylie:
  • chos kyi tog
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • dharmaketu

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­128

Dharma­megha­nirghoṣeśvarasaumya

Wylie:
  • chos sprin sgra dbyangs dbang phyug zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྤྲིན་སྒྲ་དབྱངས་དབང་ཕྱུག་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­megha­nirghoṣeśvarasaumya

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­129

Dharma­samudgata­rāja­vimala

Wylie:
  • chos yang dag ’phags rgyal po dri med
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཡང་དག་འཕགས་རྒྱལ་པོ་དྲི་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­samudgata­rāja­vimala

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­130

Dharmasumanāvarṣin

Wylie:
  • chos kyi sna ma’i me tog char ’bebs
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་སྣ་མའི་མེ་ཏོག་ཆར་འབེབས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­sumanāvarṣin

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­131

Dharma­vaśavartīśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbang phyug rnam sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྣམ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­vaśavartīśvara­rāja

The buddha whom the sixth son of King Araṇemin is prophesied to become.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­98
  • g.­26
g.­132

Dharmaveśapradīpa

Wylie:
  • chos kyi shugs kyi sgron ma
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་ཤུགས་ཀྱི་སྒྲོན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma­veśapradīpa

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­133

Dharmeśvaravinardi

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbang phyug rnam sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྣམ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmeśvaravinardi

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­134

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor srung
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra

One of the four mahārājas, he is the guardian deity for the east and traditionally lord of the gandharvas, though in this sūtra he appears to be king of the nāgas. There is a Dhṛtarāṣṭra in each four-continent world.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 3.­84-85
  • 6.­14
  • g.­314
g.­135

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor srung
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­136

Dhvajāgrākeyūra

Wylie:
  • mtha’ yas mu ma mchis pa dag
Tibetan:
  • མཐའ་ཡས་མུ་མ་མཆིས་པ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • dhvajāgrākeyūra

A buddha realm that Prince Amigha makes an aspiration to enter.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­127
g.­137

Dhvajāgrapradīpa

Wylie:
  • rgyal mtshan gyi rtse mo’i sgron ma
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་མཚན་གྱི་རྩེ་མོའི་སྒྲོན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhvajāgrapradīpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­138

Dhvajasaṃgraha

Wylie:
  • rgyal mtshan bsdus pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་མཚན་བསྡུས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhvajasaṃgraha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­139

dhyāna

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Dhyāna is defined as one-pointed abiding in an undistracted state of mind, free from afflicted mental states. Four states of dhyāna are identified as being conducive to birth within the form realm. In the context of the Mahāyāna, it is the fifth of the six perfections. It is commonly translated as “concentration,” “meditative concentration,” and so on.

Located in 61 passages in the translation:

  • i.­58
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­24
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­91
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­47
  • 3.­55
  • 4.­73
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­153-154
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­214-217
  • 4.­243
  • 4.­251
  • 4.­294
  • 4.­315-316
  • 4.­318
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­336
  • 4.­345
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­358
  • 4.­372
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­407-408
  • 5.­10
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­113
  • 5.­118
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­69
  • 6.­73
  • n.­30
  • n.­340
  • g.­87
  • g.­151
  • g.­156
  • g.­397
  • g.­501
  • g.­581
  • g.­582
  • g.­583
  • g.­584
  • g.­585
  • g.­586
  • g.­718
g.­140

distinct qualities of a buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma ’dres pa
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āveṇika­buddha­dharma

There are eighteen such qualities unique to a buddha, which consist of ten powers, four fearlessnesses, three mindfulnesses, and great compassion.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­376
g.­141

Drāṣṭāva

Wylie:
  • lda ba srung
Tibetan:
  • ལྡ་བ་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • drāṣṭāva

A brahmin who asks King Ambara, a previous life of Śākyamuni, for his eyes.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­131
g.­142

Dṛḍhasvara

Wylie:
  • brtan dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • བརྟན་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dṛḍhasvara

The thousandth of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­43
  • 4.­269
  • g.­271
g.­143

Duraṇya

Wylie:
  • rtsod med
Tibetan:
  • རྩོད་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • duraṇya

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­144

Durdhana

Wylie:
  • nor ngan
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་ངན།
Sanskrit:
  • durdhana

One of the Buddha Śākyamuni’s previous lives as a cakravartin.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­52
  • 5.­93
  • g.­111
g.­145

eight liberations

Wylie:
  • rnam par thar pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭavimokṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A series of progressively more subtle states of meditative realization or attainment. There are several presentations of these found in the canonical literature. One of the most common is as follows: (1) One observes form while the mind dwells at the level of the form realm. (2) One observes forms externally while discerning formlessness internally. (3) One dwells in the direct experience of the body’s pleasant aspect. (4) One dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite space by transcending all conceptions of matter, resistance, and diversity. (5) Transcending the sphere of infinite space, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite consciousness. (6) Transcending the sphere of infinite consciousness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of nothingness. (7) Transcending the sphere of nothingness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception. (8) Transcending the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception, one dwells in the realization of the cessation of conception and feeling.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­167
g.­146

eight unfavorable states

Wylie:
  • mi khom pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཁོམ་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭākṣaṇa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A set of circumstances that do not provide the freedom to practice the Buddhist path: being born in the realms of (1) the hells, (2) hungry ghosts (pretas), (3) animals, or (4) long-lived gods, or in the human realm among (5) barbarians or (6) extremists, (7) in places where the Buddhist teachings do not exist, or (8) without adequate faculties to understand the teachings where they do exist.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­52
g.­147

eighteen distinct qualities of the Buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma 'dres pa bcwa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ་བཅྭ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭādaśāveṇika­buddha­dharma

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Eighteen special features of a buddha’s behavior, realization, activity, and wisdom that are not shared by other beings. They are generally listed as: (1) he never makes a mistake, (2) he is never boisterous, (3) he never forgets, (4) his concentration never falters, (5) he has no notion of distinctness, (6) his equanimity is not due to lack of consideration, (7) his motivation never falters, (8) his endeavor never fails, (9) his mindfulness never falters, (10) he never abandons his concentration, (11) his insight (prajñā) never decreases, (12) his liberation never fails, (13) all his physical actions are preceded and followed by wisdom (jñāna), (14) all his verbal actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (15) all his mental actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (16) his wisdom and vision perceive the past without attachment or hindrance, (17) his wisdom and vision perceive the future without attachment or hindrance, and (18) his wisdom and vision perceive the present without attachment or hindrance.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­73
g.­148

Ekaviḍapati

Wylie:
  • lan tshwa’i bdag po gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • ལན་ཚྭའི་བདག་པོ་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekaviḍapati

A mountain in a previous eon where, according to this sūtra, medical knowledge was revealed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­120
g.­149

emptiness

Wylie:
  • stong pa nyid
Tibetan:
  • སྟོང་པ་ཉིད།
Sanskrit:
  • śunyatā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Emptiness denotes the ultimate nature of reality, the total absence of inherent existence and self-identity with respect to all phenomena. According to this view, all things and events are devoid of any independent, intrinsic reality that constitutes their essence. Nothing can be said to exist independent of the complex network of factors that gives rise to its origination, nor are phenomena independent of the cognitive processes and mental constructs that make up the conventional framework within which their identity and existence are posited. When all levels of conceptualization dissolve and when all forms of dichotomizing tendencies are quelled through deliberate meditative deconstruction of conceptual elaborations, the ultimate nature of reality will finally become manifest. It is the first of the three gateways to liberation.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 2.­67-68
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­153-154
  • 4.­164
  • 4.­169
  • 4.­316
  • 4.­367
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­384-385
  • 4.­390
  • 5.­3
g.­150

excellent features

Wylie:
  • dpe byad bzang po
Tibetan:
  • དཔེ་བྱད་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • anuvyañjana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The eighty secondary physical characteristics of a buddha and of other great beings (mahāpuruṣa), which include such details as the redness of the fingernails and the blackness of the hair. They are considered “minor” in terms of being secondary to the thirty-two major marks or signs of a great being.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­98
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­110
  • 4.­278
  • 4.­359
g.­151

factors of enlightenment

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs kyi chos
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi­pakṣaka­dharma

These are (1–4) the four mindfulnesses, which are of body, sensations, mind, and phenomena; (5–8) the four eliminations, which are eliminating the bad that has been created, not creating the bad that has not been created, creating good that has not been created, and increasing what good has been created; (9–12) the four bases of miracles, which are aspiration, diligence, contemplation, and analysis; (13–17) the five powers, which are faith, diligence, mindfulness, meditation, and wisdom; (18–22) the five strengths, which are also faith, diligence, mindfulness, meditation, and wisdom; (23– 29) the seven branches of awakening, which are mindfulness, wisdom, diligence, joy, being well trained, meditation, and equanimity; and (30–37) the eight branches of the noble path, which are right view, thought, speech, effort, livelihood, mindfulness, meditation, and action.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­14
  • 2.­39
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­69
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­263
  • n.­56
g.­152

fearlessness

Wylie:
  • mi ’jigs pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśaradya

This refers to the four confidences or fearlessnesses of the Buddha: confidence in having attained realization; confidence in having attained elimination; confidence in teaching the Dharma; and confidence in teaching the path of aspiration to liberation.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­58
  • 2.­3
  • 4.­73
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­376
  • 4.­378
  • 4.­384
  • 5.­47
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­106
  • 6.­75
  • 6.­86
  • g.­140
  • g.­161
g.­153

five actions with immediate results at death

Wylie:
  • mtshams med pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • མཚམས་མེད་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcānantarya

The five actions that lead to going instantly to hell on death are killing one’s father, killing one’s mother, killing an arhat, splitting the saṅgha, and wounding a buddha so that he bleeds.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­43
  • 2.­69
g.­154

five degeneracies

Wylie:
  • snyigs ma lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྙིགས་མ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcakaṣāya

The degeneration of lifespan, view, kleśas, beings, and time.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­61-62
  • 4.­57
  • 4.­153-155
  • 4.­157-158
  • 4.­225-227
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­255
  • 4.­328
  • 4.­359
  • 4.­400
  • 4.­402-403
  • 4.­466
  • 4.­468
  • 4.­485
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­515-517
  • 4.­519-520
  • 4.­524
  • 4.­542
  • 5.­78
  • 5.­81-84
  • 5.­109
  • 5.­116-118
  • 5.­122-124
  • 5.­126
  • 5.­145
  • 5.­147
  • 5.­151-152
  • n.­83-84
  • g.­293
g.­155

five existences

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba lnga
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañca­gati

These comprise gods and humans of the higher realms within cyclic existence, along with animals, starving spirits, and the hell dwellers, whose abodes are identified with the lower realms. It is also common to divide the god realm in two, the gods and the asuras, making up six realms or classes of beings (’gro ba drug, ṣaḍgati or rigs drug, ṣaṭkula).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­261
  • 4.­340
g.­156

five obscurations

Wylie:
  • sgrib pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲིབ་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcanivaraṇa

These are five mental impediments that hinder meditation: impediments of desire (kāmacchanda), malice (vyāpāda), depression and sloth (styānamiddha), wildness and excitement (auddhatya­kaukṛtya), and doubt, or perplexity (vicikitsa).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­219
  • 4.­328
g.­157

five tempos

Wylie:
  • yan lag lnga dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་ལྔ་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcāṅgika

The five tempos of classical music in southern India: chauka (one stroke per beat), vilamba (two strokes per beat), madhyama (four strokes per beat), dhuridha (eight strokes per beat), and adi dhuridha (sixteen strokes per beat).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­14
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­198-199
g.­158

forbearance that comes from realizing the birthlessness of phenomena

Wylie:
  • mi skye ba’i chos la bzod pa
  • mi skye ba’i chos kyi bzod pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་སྐྱེ་བའི་ཆོས་ལ་བཟོད་པ།
  • མི་སྐྱེ་བའི་ཆོས་ཀྱི་བཟོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anutpattikadharmakṣānti

This is often also interpreted as the acceptance that phenomena are birthless (or nonarising), but strictly speaking the acceptance is not so much an acquiescence regarding the view of nonarising itself as the forbearance regarding phenomena themselves (and the difficulties they may present) that is made possible by realizing that they are birthless. This is said to occur on the first, or in some texts the sixth, bhūmi. It enables bodhisattvas to bear any difficulties entailed by remaining within saṃsāra for eons, and is often said to coincide with the attainment of irreversibility in their progress toward enlightenment.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­54
  • 4.­374
  • 5.­49-50
  • g.­10
g.­159

four adversities

Wylie:
  • rgud pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒུད་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­328
g.­160

four attractive qualities

Wylie:
  • yid du ’ong ba’i chos bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་དུ་འོང་བའི་ཆོས་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catuḥ­saṅgrahavastu

Buddhas attract disciples through generosity, speaking pleasantly, consistency in action, and acting altruistically.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­45
g.­161

four confidences

Wylie:
  • mi 'jigs pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturvaiśāradya

The four types of fearlessness possessed by all buddhas: They have full confidence that (1) they are fully awakened; (2) they have removed all defilements; (3) they have taught about the obstacles to liberation; and (4) have shown the path to liberation.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­73
  • g.­152
g.­162

four errors

Wylie:
  • phyin ci log bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱིན་ཅི་ལོག་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturviparyāsa

Taking what is impermanent to be permanent, what is suffering to be happiness, what is unclean to be clean, and what is not self to be a self.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 4.­328
  • n.­18
g.­163

four great rivers

Wylie:
  • chu bo bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturogha

The same as the four āsrava (“outflows” or “contaminants”), namely (1) sensual desire, (2) conditioned existence, (3) wrong views, and (4) ignorance; also refers to birth, old age, sickness, and death.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­288
  • 4.­328
g.­164

four kinds of birth

Wylie:
  • skye gnas bzhi
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་གནས་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturyoni

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The fourfold classification of ways in which beings are born: (1) birth from an egg, (2) birth from a womb, (3) birth from warmth and moisture, and (4) miraculous birth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­340
g.­165

four māras

Wylie:
  • bdud bzhi
Tibetan:
  • བདུད་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmāra

Four personifications: devaputramāra (lha’i bu’i bdud), the divine māra, which is the distraction of pleasures; mṛtyumāra (’chi bdag gi bdud) the māra of death; skandhamāra (phung po’i bdud) the māra of the aggregates, which is the body; and kleśamāra (nyon mongs pa’i bdud) māra of the afflictions.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­134
  • 4.­328
  • 4.­370
  • 6.­86
  • n.­229
g.­166

Gaganamudra

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’i phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའི་ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaganamudra

The bodhisattva who was Abhaya, the fifth son of King Araṇemin. As prophesied, he became a pupil of the Buddha Candrottara. After Candrottara’s passing, he became the Buddha Padmottara in the southeastern buddha realm, Padmā, and he is present there during Śākyamuni’s lifetime.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • i.­24
  • i.­37
  • 2.­21
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­48-51
  • 2.­53-54
  • 4.­92-93
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­187
  • 4.­425
  • n.­209
  • n.­327
  • g.­1
  • g.­386
g.­167

Gajendreśvara

Wylie:
  • glang po che’i dbang po’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་ཆེའི་དབང་པོའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • gajendreśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­168

Gandhahasti

Wylie:
  • spos kyi glang po che
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་གླང་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhahasti

The bodhisattva who was Himaṇi, the tenth son of King Araṇemin.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­177-179
  • 4.­181
  • 4.­437
  • n.­255
  • g.­193
g.­169

Gandhapadma

Wylie:
  • spos kyi pad ma
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་པད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhapadma

A buddha in a previous eon when the Sahā realm was called Arajamerujugupsita.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­52
  • 5.­93
g.­170

Gandha­padma­vijitakīrti­rāja

Wylie:
  • spos kyi pad ma rnam rgyal grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་པད་མ་རྣམ་རྒྱལ་གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandha­padma­vijitakīrti­rāja

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­171

Gandha­padmottaravega

Wylie:
  • spos kyi pad ma dam pa’i shugs
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་པད་མ་དམ་པའི་ཤུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • gandha­padmottaravega

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­172

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • i.­57
  • 1.­6
  • 2.­79
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­84
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­405-406
  • 4.­459
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­486
  • 4.­540
  • 4.­556
  • 6.­22-23
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­91
  • n.­40
  • g.­134
  • g.­391
g.­173

Gandheśvara

Wylie:
  • spos kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • gandheśvara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-sixth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­204
  • n.­268
g.­174

Gandheśvara

Wylie:
  • spos kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • gandheśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­175

Garbha­kīrti­rāja

Wylie:
  • snying po grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་པོ་གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • garbhakīrti­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­176

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­321
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­502
  • 4.­550
  • 6.­23
g.­177

Gatīśvarasālendra

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba’i dbang phyug sA la’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gatīśvarasālendra

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­178

Ghoṣendrarāja

Wylie:
  • dbyangs kyi dbang po’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ghoṣendrarāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­179

Ghoṣeśvara

Wylie:
  • dbyangs kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • ghoṣeśvara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-third) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­204
  • n.­268
g.­180

Glorious Goddess

Wylie:
  • lha mo dpal
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • devī

King Araṇemin’s principal queen.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­24
g.­181

gośīrṣa sandalwood

Wylie:
  • tsan dan sa mchog pa
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་ས་མཆོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • gośīrṣacandana

A particular kind of sandalwood, known as “ox-head,” that grows in southern India. It is reddish in color and has medicinal properties. It is said to have the finest fragrance of all sandalwood. The Sanskrit word go means “ox,” and śīrṣa means “head”; candana means “sandalwood.” The name of this sandalwood is said to derive from either the shape or the name of a mountain upon which it grew.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­16
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­77
  • 3.­81-82
  • 4.­54
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­279
g.­182

great coral tree

Wylie:
  • man dA ra ba chen po
Tibetan:
  • མན་དཱ་ར་བ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāmāndārava

May refer to the species of coral tree called Erythrina stricta.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­97
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­389
  • 4.­394
  • 4.­460
g.­183

great elephants

Wylie:
  • glang po chen po
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahānāga

Mahānāga here could be a middle-Indic word possibly originating from the Sanskrit mahānagna, meaning “a great champion,” “a man of distinction and nobility.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­184

great eon

Wylie:
  • skal pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākalpa

The time during which a world is created and destroyed.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­5
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­319
  • 4.­397
  • 4.­410
  • 5.­78
  • 5.­82-84
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­106
  • 5.­117
  • 5.­124
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­90
  • n.­175
  • g.­196
g.­185

Great Principal

Wylie:
  • sha bo che
  • sha bo she
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་བོ་ཆེ།
  • ཤ་བོ་ཤེ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­186

Guṇākara

Wylie:
  • yon tan ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇākara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­144
  • n.­331
g.­187

Guṇaprabhāsa

Wylie:
  • yon tan ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇaprabhāsa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­188

Guṇārci

Wylie:
  • yon tan ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇārci

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­189

Guṇaśailadhvaja

Wylie:
  • yon tan ri bo’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་རི་བོའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇa­śailadhvaja

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­190

Guṇendraniryūha

Wylie:
  • yon tan dbang po
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇendraniryūha

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­191

Haripatracūḍa

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i bshes gnyen gtsug phud
  • seng ge’i bshes gnyen gtsug phud bzang po
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་བཤེས་གཉེན་གཙུག་ཕུད།
  • སེང་གེའི་བཤེས་གཉེན་གཙུག་ཕུད་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • haripatracūḍa
  • haripatracūḍabhadra

The 1,004th of the 1,005th buddhas in the Bhadraka eon. His name in Tibetan is given at its second mention in a longer form. Note the attested Sanskrit does not exactly match the extant Tibetan translations.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­269
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­282
  • g.­536
g.­192

Haritālakīrti

Wylie:
  • ba bla grags pa
Tibetan:
  • བ་བླ་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • haritālakīrti

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­193

Himaṇi

Wylie:
  • gangs kyi nor bu
Tibetan:
  • གངས་ཀྱི་ནོར་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • himaṇi

The tenth son of King Araṇemin who becomes the bodhisattva Gandhahasti and is prophesied to become the Buddha Suvarṇapuṣpa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­176
  • n.­254
  • g.­168
  • g.­623
g.­194

Hiteṣin

Wylie:
  • phan bzhed
Tibetan:
  • ཕན་བཞེད།
Sanskrit:
  • hiteṣin

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-third) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­195

in-between worlds

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gyi bar
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི་བར།
Sanskrit:
  • lokāntarika

Permanently dark places in between the four continents.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­11
  • 6.­65
g.­196

incalculable eon

Wylie:
  • skal pa grangs med pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་པ་གྲངས་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṃkhyeyakalpa

The number of years in this eon differs in various sūtras that give a number. Also, twenty intermediate eons are said to be one incalculable eon, and four incalculable eons are one great eon. In that case, those four incalculable eons represent the eons of the creation, presence, destruction, and absence of a world. In this sūtra, buddhas are often described as appearing in a second “incalculable eon.”

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­15
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­79
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­121
  • 4.­172
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­182
  • 4.­197
  • 4.­206
  • 4.­221
  • 4.­228
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­240-241
  • 4.­255
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­525
  • n.­175
  • n.­201
g.­197

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

The lord of the devas, a principal deity in the Vedas. With Brahma, he was one of the two most important deities during the Buddha’s lifetime. He was later eclipsed by the increasing importance of Śiva and Viṣṇu. See also Śakra.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­18
  • 3.­129
  • n.­426
  • g.­82
  • g.­110
  • g.­485
g.­198

Indragaṇa

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i tshogs
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་ཚོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • indragaṇa

The third of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin, who becomes bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, and is prophesied to become Buddha Samantadarśin.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­120
  • 4.­45-46
g.­199

Indra­ghoṣeśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i dbyangs kyi dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indraghoṣeśvara­rāja

The name of a buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­36
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­13
  • g.­202
g.­200

Indrākṣa

Wylie:
  • dbang po mig
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་མིག
Sanskrit:
  • indrākṣa

A yakṣa who lives in the hollow of a Sal tree where Śākyamuni meditates.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­18
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­55
g.­201

Indranemin

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • indranemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­202

Indrasuvirājitā

Wylie:
  • dbang po ltar shin tu mdzes pa
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ལྟར་ཤིན་ཏུ་མཛེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • indrasuvirājitā

A buddha realm in which the Tathāgata Indra­ghoṣeśvara­rāja resides.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­11
  • g.­344
g.­203

inhabitants of the desire realm

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa na spyod pa
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ་ན་སྤྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāmāvacara

The lowest of the three realms of samsara: desire, form, and formless.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­392
  • 6.­81
g.­204

inhabitants of the form realm

Wylie:
  • gzugs na spyod pa
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་ན་སྤྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • rūpāvacara

Beings living in the form realm rather than the desire or formless realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­81
g.­205

intermediate eon

Wylie:
  • bar gyi bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བར་གྱི་བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • antarakalpa

This eon is one cycle of the increase and decrease of the life span of beings. It is also called “a small eon.” It consists of four ages, or yugas, and the last is the kaliyuga.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • i.­24
  • 2.­17-18
  • 2.­20-22
  • 2.­48-50
  • 2.­52-54
  • 4.­13-14
  • 4.­147
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­274-276
  • 4.­278
  • 4.­394-396
  • n.­68
  • n.­174
  • g.­196
  • g.­344
  • g.­721
g.­206

irreversibility

Wylie:
  • phyir mi ldog pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱིར་མི་ལྡོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avaivartikatva

A stage in the gradual progression toward buddhahood, from which one will no longer regress to lower states.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­50
  • 2.­52
  • 3.­47
  • 4.­132
  • 4.­387-388
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­396-397
  • 4.­473
  • 4.­491
  • 4.­548-549
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­50
  • 6.­25-26
  • 6.­75-76
  • 6.­89-90
  • n.­462
  • g.­158
g.­207

Jalabhuja

Wylie:
  • chu la spyod
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ལ་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • jalabhuja

The third of the five young brahmin attendants of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Sārthavādi, the 1,002nd of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269
g.­208

Jambu River gold

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu chu bo’i gser
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུ་ཆུ་བོའི་གསེར།
Sanskrit:
  • jāmbunadasuvarṇa

The best gold in the human world, said to be formed from the fruits of a mythical tree at the Himalayan source of north India’s major rivers.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­16
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­25
g.­209

Jambūcchāya

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i grib ma
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གྲིབ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūcchāya

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­210

Jambūcchāya

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i grib ma
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གྲིབ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūcchāya

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­211

Jambudvīpa

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i gling
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གླིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambudvīpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name of the southern continent in Buddhist cosmology, which can signify either the known human world, or more specifically the Indian subcontinent, literally “the jambu island/continent.” Jambu is the name used for a range of plum-like fruits from trees belonging to the genus Szygium, particularly Szygium jambos and Szygium cumini, and it has commonly been rendered “rose apple,” although “black plum” may be a less misleading term. Among various explanations given for the continent being so named, one (in the Abhidharmakośa) is that a jambu tree grows in its northern mountains beside Lake Anavatapta, mythically considered the source of the four great rivers of India, and that the continent is therefore named from the tree or the fruit. Jambudvīpa has the Vajrāsana at its center and is the only continent upon which buddhas attain awakening.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • i.­29
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­79
  • 3.­90-94
  • 3.­96-97
  • 3.­114
  • 4.­292
  • 5.­62-64
  • 5.­73
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­95-98
  • 5.­108-109
  • 5.­113-116
  • 5.­118-119
  • 5.­124
  • 5.­129
  • 5.­141-142
  • 5.­148
  • g.­93
  • g.­474
  • g.­664
g.­212

Jambūnada

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i chu klung
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་ཆུ་ཀླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūnada

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­213

Jambūprabha

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūprabha

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­214

Jambūvana

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i tshal
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūvana

“Rose-Apple Tree Park.” The name of the park in which the Buddha Ratnagarbha teaches King Araṇemin and his family and subjects.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­28
  • 3.­8-10
  • 3.­89-92
  • 3.­114-115
  • 4.­476
  • 4.­494
g.­215

jasmine

Wylie:
  • sna ma’i me tog
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་མའི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • sumanā

Specifically, Jasminium grandiforum, known in English as Spanish, royal, or Catalonian jasmine.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­40-41
  • 3.­97
  • 4.­41-42
  • 4.­44
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­164
  • g.­377
g.­216

Javanemin

Wylie:
  • shugs kyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • ཤུགས་ཀྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • javanemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­217

Jayasaṃkhya

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba’i grangs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བའི་གྲངས།
Sanskrit:
  • jayasaṃkhya

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­218

Jayasoma

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba’i zla ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བའི་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jayasoma

The future name of the eastern realm Abhirati when the Buddhas Akṣobhya and Suvarṇapuṣpa are succeeded by the Buddha Nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­182
  • g.­5
  • g.­361
  • g.­561
g.­219

Jayavaiśraya

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba’i gnas rab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བའི་གནས་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • jayavaiśraya

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­220

Jayāvatī

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba can
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • jayāvatī

A realm to the west of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm in which resides the Buddha Jitendriya­viśāla­netra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­480
g.­221

jina

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jina AD

A common epithet of the buddhas, and also used by the Jains, hence their name. It means “the victorious one.”

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­14
  • 4.­37
  • 4.­94
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­127
  • 4.­223
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­301
  • 4.­326-327
  • 4.­399
  • 4.­404
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­88
  • 5.­90-91
g.­222

Jinamitra

Wylie:
  • dzi na mi tra
Tibetan:
  • ཛི་ན་མི་ཏྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • jinamitra

Jinamitra was invited to Tibet during the reign of King Trisong Detsen (r. 742–98 ᴄᴇ) and was involved with the translation of nearly two hundred texts, continuing into the reign of King Ralpachen (r. 815–38 ᴄᴇ). He was among the small group of paṇḍitas responsible for the Mahā­vyutpatti Sanskrit–Tibetan dictionary.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­223

Jitendriya­viśāla­netra

Wylie:
  • dbang po thul ba yangs pa’i spyan
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ཐུལ་བ་ཡངས་པའི་སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • jitendriya­viśāla­netra

A buddha in a western realm who sends bodhisattvas to make offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha and Mahākāruṇika.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­480
  • g.­70
  • g.­220
  • g.­569
g.­224

Jñānabhāskara

Wylie:
  • ye shes nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānabhāskara

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm. He is not mentioned anywhere else in the Kangyur.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­225

Jñānabimba

Wylie:
  • ye shes gzugs
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་གཟུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānabimba

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­226

Jñānacīvara

Wylie:
  • ye shes chos gos
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཆོས་གོས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānacīvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­227

Jñānadhvaja

Wylie:
  • ye shes rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānadhvaja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the nineteenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­228

Jñānaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • ye shes dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānaghoṣa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­144
  • n.­233
g.­229

Jñānakīrti

Wylie:
  • ye shes grags pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānakīrti

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­445
g.­230

Jñānakrama

Wylie:
  • ye shes go rims
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་གོ་རིམས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānakrama

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­231

Jñāna­kusumavi­raja­samucchraya­bodhīśvara

Wylie:
  • ye shes me tog rdul bral byang chun dbang phyub yang dag mtho
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་མེ་ཏོག་རྡུལ་བྲལ་བྱང་ཆུན་དབང་ཕྱུབ་ཡང་དག་མཐོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­kusumaviraja­samucchraya­bodhīśvara

A buddha during a kaliyuga in the eastern realm Jvālapratisaṃkhyā, who had passed into nirvana and whose Dharma had ended before the time of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­544-546
  • g.­249
  • g.­302
  • g.­348
g.­232

Jñānamerudhvaja

Wylie:
  • ye shes lhun po’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ལྷུན་པོའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānamerudhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­233

Jñānaprabha

Wylie:
  • ye shes ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānaprabha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­234

Jñānapradīpa

Wylie:
  • ye shes sgron ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་སྒྲོན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānapradīpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­235

Jñānapravāḍa

Wylie:
  • ye shes rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānapravāḍa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­236

Jñānārci

Wylie:
  • ye shes ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānārci

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­237

Jñānasāgara­rāja

Wylie:
  • ye shes rgya mtsho’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་རྒྱ་མཚོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānasāgara­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­238

Jñānasaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • ye shes yang dag ’byung
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཡང་དག་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānasaṃbhava

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­144
  • g.­530
g.­239

Jñāna­saṃbhavabala­rāja

Wylie:
  • ye shes ’byung ba stobs kyi rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་འབྱུང་བ་སྟོབས་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­saṃbhavabala­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­240

Jñānasaṃnicaya

Wylie:
  • ye shes yang dag bstsags
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཡང་དག་བསྩགས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānasaṃnicaya

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­241

Jñāna­suvimala­garjiteśvara

Wylie:
  • ye shes shin tu dri med sgrogs pa’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཤིན་ཏུ་དྲི་མེད་སྒྲོགས་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­suvimala­garjiteśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­242

Jñāna­tāpasuviśuddha­guṇā

Wylie:
  • ye shes kyi chu shin tu rnam par dag pa’i yon tan
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཀྱི་ཆུ་ཤིན་ཏུ་རྣམ་པར་དག་པའི་ཡོན་ཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānatāpasuviśuddha­guṇā

The northern realm in which the bodhisattva Samantabhadra, the eighth son of King Araṇemin, is prophesied to become a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­137
g.­243

Jñānavajraketu

Wylie:
  • ye shes rdo rje’i tog
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་རྡོ་རྗེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­vajraketu

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Siṃha­vijṛmbhiteśvara­rāja to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­479
g.­244

Jñāna­vajra­vijṛmbhiteśvara­ketu

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­vajra­vijṛmbhiteśvara­ketu

The buddha whom the bodhisattva Samantabhadra, the eighth son of King Araṇemin, is prophesied to become.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­137
  • g.­27
g.­245

Jñānavikrama

Wylie:
  • rnam par gnon pa’i ye shes
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གནོན་པའི་ཡེ་ཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānavikrama

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­246

Jñānavimala

Wylie:
  • ye shes dri med
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་དྲི་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānavimala

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­247

Jñāna­virajavega

Wylie:
  • ye shes rdul bral shugs
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་རྡུལ་བྲལ་ཤུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna­virajavega

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­248

Jvāla­kuṇḍeśvara­ghoṣa

Wylie:
  • me lce thab khung dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ལྕེ་ཐབ་ཁུང་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • jvāla­kuṇḍeśvara­ghoṣa

The name of one thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­142
g.­249

Jvālapratisaṃkhyā

Wylie:
  • ’od zer so sor rtog pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • jvālaprati­saṃkhyā

An eastern buddha realm where during a kaliyuga the Buddha Jñāna­kusumavi­raja­samucchraya­bodhīśvara appeared and passed into nirvāṇa before the time of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­544
  • g.­231
g.­250

Jyotigandha

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i dri
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་དྲི།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotigandha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the third) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­203
g.­251

Jyotigarbha

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotigarbha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­252

Jyotigarbha

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotigarbha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­253

Jyotigarbha

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotigarbha

The name of a buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­254

Jyotipāla

Wylie:
  • skar ma skyong
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotipāla

The first of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Krakucchanda, the first buddha in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­226
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­234
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­455
g.­255

jyotīrasa

Wylie:
  • skar ma mdog
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་མདོག
Sanskrit:
  • jyotīrasa

A type of crystal or quartz (sphaṭika) that may in some cases be blue in color.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­16
  • 5.­124
  • 5.­126
g.­256

Jyotīrasa

Wylie:
  • skar ma la dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་ལ་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotīrasa

A buddha who in accord with his prayers became a buddha in a kaliyuga at the time of the Buddha Ratnagarbha. He is only seven thumbs in size in the realm Aṅguṣṭhā where the beings are the height of a thumb.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­47
  • 4.­514-515
  • 4.­519
  • g.­39
  • g.­449
g.­257

Jyotīrasa

Wylie:
  • skar ma la dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་ལ་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotīrasa

A young brahmin who interacts with King Ambara.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­129
g.­258

Jyotiraśmi

Wylie:
  • snang ba’i ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་བའི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotiraśmi

A bodhisattva sent by the Buddha Vimalateja­guṇa­rāja to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­15
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­36
g.­259

Jyotiśrīgarbha

Wylie:
  • snang dpal snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་དཔལ་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotiśrīgarbha

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm. He is not mentioned anywhere else in the Kangyur.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­260

Jyotīśvara

Wylie:
  • snang ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • jyotīśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­261

Kaduścara

Wylie:
  • mdzes spyod
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • kaduścara

A lord of the asuras who prays to be Samudrareṇu’s attendant when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Ānanda.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­533
g.­262

Kāla

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāla

The Kāla Mountains of Bharatavarṣa (i.e., India).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­11
  • 4.­5
g.­263

Kālasūtra

Wylie:
  • thig nag po
Tibetan:
  • ཐིག་ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kālasūtra

The second of the traditional Buddhist list of eight hot hells‍—the “black cord” hell. Explanations vary as to whether these cords or wires cut through a person, burn them, or mark them for cutting up.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­264

kaliyuga

Wylie:
  • rtsod pa’i dus
Tibetan:
  • རྩོད་པའི་དུས།
Sanskrit:
  • kaliyuga

The fourth in a repeating cycle of four ages, in which the lives of beings are short and the world is afflicted by famine, illness, and war.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • i.­40
  • i.­45
  • i.­47
  • i.­51
  • 4.­240-241
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­303
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­309
  • 4.­400
  • 4.­402-403
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­454
  • 4.­466
  • 4.­468
  • 4.­485
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­517
  • 4.­542
  • g.­205
  • g.­231
  • g.­249
  • g.­256
  • g.­348
  • g.­449
g.­265

kalyāṇamitra

Wylie:
  • dge ba’i bshes gnyen
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བའི་བཤེས་གཉེན།
Sanskrit:
  • kalyāṇamitra

“The beneficial friend,” or “friend of virtue.” A title for a teacher of the spiritual path.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­46
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­55
  • 4.­306
  • 4.­332
  • 4.­517
  • 5.­37
  • 5.­67
  • 6.­8
  • g.­309
g.­266

Kanakadhvaja

Wylie:
  • gser gyi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakadhvaja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fiftieth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­267

Kanakalocana

Wylie:
  • gser spyan
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakalocana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­268

Kanakamuni

Wylie:
  • gser thub
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་ཐུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakamuni

The second buddha in the Bhadraka eon. The Buddha Ratnagarbha specifically prophesies that the third of Ratnagarbha’s thousand Veda-reciting pupils will be this buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­258
  • n.­278
  • g.­647
g.­269

Kanakamuni

Wylie:
  • gser thub
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་ཐུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakamuni

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifteenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­270

Kāñcanadhvaja

Wylie:
  • gser gyi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • kāñcanadhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­271

Karabhuja

Wylie:
  • lo thang spyod
Tibetan:
  • ལོ་ཐང་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • karabhuja

The first of the five young brahmin attendants of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Dṛḍhasvara, the thousandth of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269
g.­272

Karadharavikrama

Wylie:
  • sku mchog rnam par gnon
Tibetan:
  • སྐུ་མཆོག་རྣམ་པར་གནོན།
Sanskrit:
  • karadharavikrama

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­273

Kāṣāya

Wylie:
  • ngur smrig
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་སྨྲིག
Sanskrit:
  • kāṣāya

A realm to the north of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm in which resides the Buddha Lokeśvararāja.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­481
g.­274

Kaṣāyadhvaja

Wylie:
  • ngur smrig gi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་སྨྲིག་གི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṣāyadhvaja

The eastern realm in which Vāyuviṣṇu, the eldest of the thousand Veda-reciting pupils of Samudrareṇu, will become the Buddha Śalendrarāja.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­228
g.­275

Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśyapa

The third buddha in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­241
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­258
  • n.­278
  • g.­731
g.­276

kaṭapūtana

Wylie:
  • lus srul po
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་སྲུལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṭapūtana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A subgroup of pūtanas, a class of disease-causing spirits associated with cemeteries and dead bodies. The name probably derives from the Skt. pūta, “foul-smelling,” as reflected also in the Tib. srul po. The smell of a pūtana is variously described in the texts as resembling that of a billy goat or a crow, and the smell of a kaṭapūtana, as its name suggests, could resemble a corpse, kaṭa being one of the names for “corpse.” The morbid condition caused by pūtanas comes in various forms, with symptoms such as fever, vomiting, diarrhea, skin eruptions, and festering wounds, the latter possibly explaining the association with bad smells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­133
g.­277

Kauṇḍinya

Wylie:
  • kauN+Di n+ya
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽཎྜི་ནྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṇḍinya

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventeenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­204
  • n.­384
g.­278

Kauśika

Wylie:
  • kau shi ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཤི་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kauśika

A śakra deity who comes to Śākyamuni to have his life extended.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­22-23
  • 6.­26
g.­279

Kāya

Wylie:
  • lus bzangs
  • lus bzang
  • lus bzungs
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་བཟངས།
  • ལུས་བཟང་།
  • ལུས་བཟུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kāya

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­33
  • n.­144
g.­280

Ketacīvara­saṃbhṛta­rāja

Wylie:
  • gnas kyi gos bstsags rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གནས་ཀྱི་གོས་བསྩགས་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ketacīvara­saṃbhṛta­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­281

Ketapuri

Wylie:
  • gnas pa’i grong khyer
Tibetan:
  • གནས་པའི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
Sanskrit:
  • ketapuri

The personal name of the Brahmā in the world and era of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • 3.­101
  • 4.­527
  • n.­375
g.­282

Kimīśvarabīja

Wylie:
  • ci’i dbang phyug sa bon
Tibetan:
  • ཅིའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་ས་བོན།
Sanskrit:
  • kimīśvarabīja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­283

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kiṃnara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­133
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­550
  • 5.­69
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­85
g.­284

Kīrtirāja

Wylie:
  • grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kīrtirāja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-third) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­285

Kīrtīśvaraghoṣa

Wylie:
  • ’od zer bral ba’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་བྲལ་བའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kīrtīśvaraghoṣa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­286

Kīrtīśvararāja

Wylie:
  • grags pa’i dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kīrtīśvararāja

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­287

kleśa

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by various psychological defilements, which destroy the mind’s peace and composure and lead to unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind, acting as causes for continued existence in saṃsāra. Included among them are the primary afflictions of desire (rāga), anger (dveṣa), and ignorance (avidyā). It is said that there are eighty-four thousand of these negative mental qualities, for which the eighty-four thousand categories of the Buddha’s teachings serve as the antidote.

Kleśa is also commonly translated as “negative emotions,” “disturbing emotions,” and so on. The Pāli kilesa, Middle Indic kileśa, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kleśa all primarily mean “stain” or “defilement.” The translation “affliction” is a secondary development that derives from the more general (non-Buddhist) classical understanding of √kliś (“to harm,“ “to afflict”). Both meanings are noted by Buddhist commentators.

Located in 69 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­5-6
  • 2.­10
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­55
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­72
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­94
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­134
  • 4.­139
  • 4.­209
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­217
  • 4.­227
  • 4.­231
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­262
  • 4.­274-276
  • 4.­279
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­290
  • 4.­296
  • 4.­303
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­313
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­355-356
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­402-403
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­432
  • 4.­436
  • 4.­446
  • 4.­448
  • 4.­454
  • 4.­458
  • 4.­466
  • 4.­468
  • 4.­485
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­522
  • 4.­525
  • 4.­533
  • 4.­542
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­11
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­76
  • 6.­86
  • n.­229
  • n.­298
  • n.­318
  • g.­154
g.­288

Korabha

Wylie:
  • rtsom
Tibetan:
  • རྩོམ།
Sanskrit:
  • korabha

A deva who made offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­90
g.­289

Krakucchanda

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba ’jig
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ་འཇིག
Sanskrit:
  • krakutsanda

The fourth of the seven buddhas with Śākyamuni as the seventh. Also the first of the buddhas in this Bhadraka eon, with Śākyamuni as the fourth.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • i.­45
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­235-236
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­326
  • n.­278
  • g.­254
g.­290

Kramavinardita­rāja

Wylie:
  • rim gyis sgrogs pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རིམ་གྱིས་སྒྲོགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kramavinardita­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­291

Kṣamottara

Wylie:
  • bde mchog
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • kṣamottara

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­292

Kṣāntinemin

Wylie:
  • bzod pa’i mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • བཟོད་པའི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣāntinemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­293

Kṣāravarcani­kuñjitā

Wylie:
  • ’gyur byed mi gtsang bstsags
Tibetan:
  • འགྱུར་བྱེད་མི་གཙང་བསྩགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣāravarcani­kuñjitā

A realm with the five degeneracies in which the bodhisattvas Saṃrocana and Prahasitabāhu, both pupils of the Buddha Śākyamuni, are prophesied to become buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­84-85
g.­294

Kṣemarāja

Wylie:
  • bde ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣemarāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­295

Kṣīrasa

Wylie:
  • ’o ma ’dzag.
Tibetan:
  • འོ་མ་འཛག།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣīrasa

A mendicant who asks King Ambara, a previous life of Śākyamuni, for his hands.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­135
g.­296

kumbhāṇḍa

Wylie:
  • grul bum
Tibetan:
  • གྲུལ་བུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhāṇḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of dwarf beings subordinate to Virūḍhaka, one of the Four Great Kings, associated with the southern direction. The name uses a play on the word aṇḍa, which means “egg” but is also a euphemism for a testicle. Thus, they are often depicted as having testicles as big as pots (from kumbha, or “pot”).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • 1.­6
  • 2.­36
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­84
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­550
  • g.­723
g.­297

Kusumagaṇi

Wylie:
  • me tog tshogs can
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་ཚོགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kusumagaṇi

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­298

Kusumaprabha

Wylie:
  • me tog ’od
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • kusumaprabha

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­299

Kusumavicitra

Wylie:
  • me tog sna tshogs
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་སྣ་ཚོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kusumavicitra

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­300

kūṭāgāra

Wylie:
  • khang pa brtsegs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཁང་པ་བརྩེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kūṭāgāra

Distinctive Indian assembly hall or temple with one ground-floor room and a high ornamental roof, sometimes a barrel shape with apses but more usually a tapering roof, tower, or spire, it contains at least one additional upper room within the structure. Kūṭāgāra literally means “upper chamber” and is short for kūṭāgāraśala, “hall with an upper chamber or chambers.” The Mahābodhi temple in Bodhgaya is an example of a kūṭāgāra.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15-17
  • 2.­53
  • 3.­14-15
  • 3.­89-91
  • 4.­159
g.­301

Latākusumadhvaja

Wylie:
  • ’khri shing me tog rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • འཁྲི་ཤིང་མེ་ཏོག་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • latākusumadhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­302

Lokeśvarajyotiṣa

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten dbang phyug ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་དབང་ཕྱུག་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • lokeśvara­jyotiṣa

A buddha in the distant past with whom the past Buddha Jñāna­kusumavi­raja­samucchraya­bodhīśvara first developed the aspiration to enlightenment.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­544
g.­303

Lokeśvararāja

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • lokeśvararāja

A buddha in a northern realm who sends bodhisattvas to make offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha and Mahākāruṇika.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­481
  • g.­9
  • g.­273
  • g.­408
g.­304

lotsawa

Wylie:
  • lots+tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • ལོཙྪ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • locāva

Honorific term for a Tibetan translator.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­1
g.­305

Mādhvava

Wylie:
  • dron pa can
Tibetan:
  • དྲོན་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • mādhvava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­306

Magadha

Wylie:
  • ma ga dha
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • magadha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian kingdom that lay to the south of the Ganges River in what today is the state of Bihar. Magadha was the largest of the sixteen “great states” (mahājanapada) that flourished between the sixth and third centuries ʙᴄᴇ in northern India. During the life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, it was ruled by King Bimbisāra and later by Bimbisāra's son, Ajātaśatru. Its capital was initially Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir) but was later moved to Pāṭaliputra (modern-day Patna). Over the centuries, with the expansion of the Magadha’s might, it became the capital of the vast Mauryan empire and seat of the great King Aśoka.

This region is home to many of the most important Buddhist sites, including Bodh Gayā, where the Buddha attained awakening; Vulture Peak (Gṛdhra­kūṭa), where the Buddha bestowed many well-known Mahāyāna sūtras; and the Buddhist university of Nālandā that flourished between the fifth and twelfth centuries ᴄᴇ, among many others.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23
  • g.­436
g.­307

Mahābalavegadhārin

Wylie:
  • stobs chen shugs ’chang
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཆེན་ཤུགས་འཆང་།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābalavegadhārin

The youngest of the thousand young Veda-reciting pupils of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha names him the bodhisattva Bhaiṣajya­rāja­jyotirvi­mala and prophesies that he will be the Buddha Roca, the last buddha in the Bhadraka eon, the 1,005th buddha of the eon.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­43-44
  • 4.­259
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­270-271
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­453
  • n.­285
  • g.­74
g.­308

Mahācakravāḍa

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gyi bar dag
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི་བར་དག
Sanskrit:
  • mahācakravāḍa

Name of a mountain range in Buddhist cosmology.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­34
  • 3.­119
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­101
  • 6.­65
g.­309

Mahā­karuṇā­vairocana­saumya

Wylie:
  • snying rje chen po rnam par snang byed
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་རྗེ་ཆེན་པོ་རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­karuṇā­vairocana­saumya

Literally “The Peaceful Illumination of Great Compassion.”A bodhisattva who was the kalyāṇamitra and benefactor of the tathāgata Ratnagarbha. He now resides in the world realm Aṅguṣṭhā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­517
g.­310

Mahākāruṇika

Wylie:
  • thugs rje chen po dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུགས་རྗེ་ཆེན་པོ་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāruṇika

The bodhisattva name given to the brahmin Samudrareṇu (who would eventually become the Buddha Śākyamuni) on account of his great compassion for beings. It means “One Who Has Great Compassion.”

Located in 54 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45-51
  • 4.­464
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­469-470
  • 4.­484
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­496
  • 4.­524-526
  • 4.­528-534
  • 4.­536-537
  • 4.­539
  • 4.­541-547
  • 4.­554-556
  • 5.­1-3
  • 5.­47
  • 5.­51
  • 5.­53-54
  • 5.­56-58
  • 5.­72
  • g.­223
  • g.­303
  • g.­316
  • g.­568
  • g.­569
  • g.­571
g.­311

Mahāmeru

Wylie:
  • lhun po chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāmeru

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­312

Mahāprajāpatī

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag mo chen mo
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་མོ་ཆེན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprajāpati

The maternal aunt and adoptive mother of the Buddha as well as the first woman to be ordained.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­379
  • g.­686
g.­313

Mahāprasandaya

Wylie:
  • rab tu che bstsags
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་ཆེ་བསྩགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprasandaya

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­314

mahārāja

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahārāja

Deities on the base of Mount Meru, each one the guardian of his direction: Vaiśravaṇa in the north, Dhṛtarāṣṭra in the east, Virūpākṣa in the west, and Virūḍhaka in the south.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • 1.­5-6
  • 3.­72
  • 3.­77
  • 3.­79
  • 3.­81
  • 3.­84
  • g.­134
  • g.­671
  • g.­723
  • g.­724
g.­315

Mahāraurava

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod chen po
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāraurava

The fourth of the hot hells in Buddhism. The name in Tibetan means “weeping and wailing.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­316

mahāsattva

Wylie:
  • sems dpa’ chen po
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་དཔའ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsattva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term can be understood to mean “great courageous one” or "great hero,” or (from the Sanskrit) simply “great being,” and is almost always found as an epithet of “bodhisattva.” The qualification “great” in this term, according to the majority of canonical definitions, focuses on the generic greatness common to all bodhisattvas, i.e., the greatness implicit in the bodhisattva vow itself in terms of outlook, aspiration, number of beings to be benefited, potential or eventual accomplishments, and so forth. In this sense the mahā- (“great”) is close in its connotations to the mahā- in “Mahāyāna.” While individual bodhisattvas described as mahāsattva may in many cases also be “great” in terms of their level of realization, this is largely coincidental, and in the canonical texts the epithet is not restricted to bodhisattvas at any particular point in their career. Indeed, in a few cases even bodhisattvas whose path has taken a wrong direction are still described as bodhisattva mahāsattva.

Later commentarial writings do nevertheless define the term‍—variably‍—in terms of bodhisattvas having attained a particular level (bhūmi) or realization. The most common qualifying criteria mentioned are attaining the path of seeing, attaining irreversibility (according to its various definitions), or attaining the seventh bhūmi.

In this text:

In chapter 4 of this text (see 4.­513) the Buddha Ratnagarbha states that bodhisattvas who have vowed to attain awakening under relatively easier circumstances do not deserve the title mahāsattva, which should be reserved for those like Mahākāruṇika who have vowed to attain awakening only in the most degenerate and difficult times and places. However, this statement is best taken as highlighting a specific point of perspective rather than as a general gloss, since throughout the text the term is nevertheless used‍—just as it is in most Mahāyāna sūtras‍—as an epithet for bodhisattvas in general regardless of their individual status, qualities, or aspirations.

Located in 132 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • i.­47
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­7-9
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­22-23
  • 1.­25
  • 2.­2-4
  • 2.­7-8
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­21-23
  • 2.­35-36
  • 2.­38-39
  • 2.­43
  • 2.­45-51
  • 2.­53-71
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­46
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­60-61
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­16-17
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­74
  • 4.­105
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­380
  • 4.­399
  • 4.­457
  • 4.­461
  • 4.­463-464
  • 4.­467-469
  • 4.­471
  • 4.­478-484
  • 4.­486-489
  • 4.­496
  • 4.­499
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­516-517
  • 4.­521-523
  • 4.­537
  • 4.­539
  • 4.­542-544
  • 4.­547
  • 4.­554-556
  • 5.­1-5
  • 5.­47
  • 5.­50-51
  • 5.­53-54
  • 5.­56-57
  • 5.­114
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­19
  • 6.­56
  • 6.­77
  • 6.­88
  • n.­38-39
  • n.­56
  • n.­68
  • n.­145-146
  • n.­393
  • n.­394
  • n.­448
g.­317

Mahāsthāmaprāpta

Wylie:
  • mthu chen thob
Tibetan:
  • མཐུ་ཆེན་ཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsthāmaprāpta

One of the two principal bodhisattvas in Sukhāvatī and prominent in Chinese Buddhism. In Tibetan Buddhism he is identified with Vajrapāṇi, though they are separate bodhisattvas in the sūtras. The second of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin, on becoming a bodhisattva, is given the name Mahāsthāmaprāpta, and as such in the future will be in Sukhāvatī as that bodhisattva when his father becomes the Buddha Amitābha. He will eventually become the Buddha Supra­tiṣṭhita­guṇa­maṇikūṭa­rāja in that realm.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­13
  • i.­37
  • 4.­40
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­421
  • n.­185
  • g.­379
  • g.­612
g.­318

Mahā­vīrya­ghoṣeśvara

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus chen po’i dbyangs kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་ཆེན་པོའི་དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­vīrya­ghoṣeśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­319

Mahāyāna

Wylie:
  • theg pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāyāna AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

When the Buddhist teachings are classified according to their power to lead beings to an awakened state, a distinction is made between the teachings of the Lesser Vehicle (Hīnayāna), which emphasizes the individual’s own freedom from cyclic existence as the primary motivation and goal, and those of the Great Vehicle (Mahāyāna), which emphasizes altruism and has the liberation of all sentient beings as the principal objective. As the term “Great Vehicle” implies, the path followed by bodhisattvas is analogous to a large carriage that can transport a vast number of people to liberation, as compared to a smaller vehicle for the individual practitioner.

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­10-11
  • i.­13
  • i.­29
  • i.­35
  • 1.­7
  • 1.­26-27
  • 2.­102
  • 3.­44
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­125
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­249
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­360
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­366
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­380-382
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­462
  • 4.­479
  • 4.­481
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­498
  • 4.­510
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­543
  • 4.­557
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­159
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­92
  • n.­3
  • n.­369
  • g.­316
  • g.­493
  • g.­575
g.­320

Mahendra

Wylie:
  • dbang chen
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahendra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-fifth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­321

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara

One of the most frequently used names for Śiva.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­361
  • 6.­14
  • n.­11
  • g.­573
g.­322

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • lto ’phye chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟོ་འཕྱེ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­133
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­550
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­85
g.­323

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya

The bodhisattva who became Śākyamuni’s regent and is prophesied to be the next buddha, the fifth buddha in the Bhadraka eon. In early Buddhism he appears as the human disciple sent to pay his respects by his teacher, and the Buddha gives him the gift of a robe and prophesies he will be the next Buddha, while his companion Ajita will be the next cakravartin. As a bodhisattva he has both of these names. In The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra, the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that Vimalavaiśayana, the fourth of the thousand young Veda-reciting pupils of Samudrareṇu, will be the Buddha Maitreya.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • i.­16
  • i.­26
  • i.­41
  • i.­58-59
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­8-9
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­78
  • 4.­255
  • 4.­258
  • 6.­70
  • 6.­72
  • 6.­88
  • g.­489
  • g.­544
  • g.­712
g.­324

Mājava

Wylie:
  • dus pa can
Tibetan:
  • དུས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • mājava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­325

mānapūrṇā

Wylie:
  • ma na par+Na
Tibetan:
  • མ་ན་པརྞ།
Sanskrit:
  • mānapūrṇā

An unidentified flower.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­389
g.­326

Mānava

Wylie:
  • shed bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤེད་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • mānava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­327

Maṇibhadra

Wylie:
  • nor bu bzang
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇibhadra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixtieth) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­328

Maṇimūlavyūha

Wylie:
  • nor bu gzhir bkod
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་གཞིར་བཀོད།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇimūlavyūha

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­329

mañjuśaka

Wylie:
  • man dzu sha ka
  • man dzu sha ka chen po
Tibetan:
  • མན་ཛུ་ཤ་ཀ
  • མན་ཛུ་ཤ་ཀ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśaka
  • mahāmañjuśaka

Unidentified soft white flowers said to bloom in the deva realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­389
g.­330

Mañjuśrī

Wylie:
  • ’jam dpal
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Mañjuśrī is one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha” and a bodhisattva who embodies wisdom. He is a major figure in the Mahāyāna sūtras, appearing often as an interlocutor of the Buddha. In his most well-known iconographic form, he is portrayed bearing the sword of wisdom in his right hand and a volume of the Prajñā­pāramitā­sūtra in his left. To his name, Mañjuśrī, meaning “Gentle and Glorious One,” is often added the epithet Kumārabhūta, “having a youthful form.” He is also called Mañjughoṣa, Mañjusvara, and Pañcaśikha.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­2
  • i.­37
  • 4.­69-73
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­423
  • n.­202
  • g.­198
  • g.­331
  • g.­497
  • g.­593
g.­331

Mañjuśrī Kumārabhūta

Wylie:
  • ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་དཔལ་གཞོན་ནུར་གྱུར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī­kumārabhūta

An epithet of Mañjuśrī, the “Ever-Youthful.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­74
g.­332

Manojñaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • yid du ’ong ba’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་དུ་འོང་བའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • manojñaghoṣa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­333

Manojñaghoṣa­svara­vinardita

Wylie:
  • yid du ’ong ba’i sgra dbyangs rnam par bsgrags pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་དུ་འོང་བའི་སྒྲ་དབྱངས་རྣམ་པར་བསྒྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • manojñaghoṣa­svaravinardita

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­334

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • 2.­6
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­100
  • 3.­105-107
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­363
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­378
  • 4.­432
  • 4.­446
  • 4.­525
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­102
  • 5.­106
  • 5.­153
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­85
  • n.­115
  • n.­119
  • n.­245
  • g.­72
  • g.­165
  • g.­425
g.­335

Māra­bhavana­vidhvaṃsana

Wylie:
  • bdud kyi gnas rnam par ’joms pa
Tibetan:
  • བདུད་ཀྱི་གནས་རྣམ་པར་འཇོམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • māra­bhavana­vidhvaṃsana

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­62
g.­336

Māravinardita

Wylie:
  • nga rgyal sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • ང་རྒྱལ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • māravinardita

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­337

Mārdava

Wylie:
  • mnyen des
  • mnyen shes
Tibetan:
  • མཉེན་དེས།
  • མཉེན་ཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • mārdava

The twelfth of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin. No details are given of the prophecy given to him.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­33
  • 4.­187
g.­338

Mārīci

Wylie:
  • ’od zer can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • mārīci

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-first) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­339

Maticandrarāja

Wylie:
  • blo gros zla ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ཟླ་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maticandrarāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­340

Maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maudgalyāyana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, paired with Śāriputra. He was renowned for his miraculous powers. His family clan was descended from Mudgala, hence his name Maudgalyā­yana, “the son of Mudgala’s descendants.” Respectfully referred to as Mahā­maudgalyā­yana, “Great Maudgalyāyana.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­381
  • g.­394
g.­341

Māyādevī

Wylie:
  • lha mo sgyu ma
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ་སྒྱུ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • māyādevī

The queen who was the mother of Śākyamuni Buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­377
  • g.­716
g.­342

Meru

Wylie:
  • lhun po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • meru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­295
  • 4.­371
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­87
  • 5.­104-105
  • n.­335
  • n.­380
  • g.­93
  • g.­314
  • g.­754
g.­343

Meruprabha

Wylie:
  • lhun po ’od
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • meruprabha

The name of an eastern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni can see.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­344

Meruprabhā

Wylie:
  • lhun po’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • meruprabhā

Sixty intermediate eons after Indraghoṣeśvararāja has passed into parinirvāṇa and his dharma has come too an end, the buddha realm Indrasuvirājitā will be named Meruprabhā. The Tathāgata Acintyamatiguṇarāja will reside in this buddha realm and give teachings.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­13
  • g.­721
g.­345

Merupratiṣṭhita

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba’i dbang phyug sA la’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • merupratiṣṭhita

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­346

Merupuṇya

Wylie:
  • bsod nams lhun po
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་ལྷུན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • merupuṇya

A yakṣa ṛṣi who promises Śākyamuni that he will promulgate The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra in the future.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­59
  • 6.­88
  • 6.­90
g.­347

Merurāja

Wylie:
  • lhun po’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • merurāja

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­348

Meruśikhariṃdhara

Wylie:
  • lhun po rtse ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ་རྩེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • meruśikhariṃdhara

The name of a bodhisattva who had prayed to be a buddha in a kaliyuga and by the time of the Buddha Ratnagarbha had become the Buddha Jñāna­kusumavi­raja­samucchraya­bodhīśvara and passed into nirvana.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­49
  • 4.­544
g.­349

Meruśrīkalpa

Wylie:
  • lhun po’i dpal lta bu
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོའི་དཔལ་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • meruśrīkalpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­350

Meru­svara­sandarśana­meru

Wylie:
  • lhun dbyangs lhun po yang dag ston
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་དབྱངས་ལྷུན་པོ་ཡང་དག་སྟོན།
Sanskrit:
  • meru­svara­sandarśana­meru

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm. He is not mentioned anywhere else in the Kangyur.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­351

Middha

Wylie:
  • grub pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • middha

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin. The Tibetan translates the term siddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­33
  • n.­111
g.­352

Mīḍhapāṣāṇa

Wylie:
  • rdo ba mi gtsang ba
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་བ་མི་གཙང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mīḍhapāṣāṇa

Unidentified mountains.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­11
g.­353

Miṣa

Wylie:
  • gran med
Tibetan:
  • གྲན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • miṣa

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­354

Mukhava

Wylie:
  • gdong can
Tibetan:
  • གདོང་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • mukhava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­355

Muktāprabhasaṃcaya

Wylie:
  • ’od ’gyed yang dag bsags
Tibetan:
  • འོད་འགྱེད་ཡང་དག་བསགས།
Sanskrit:
  • muktāprabha­saṃcaya

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­356

Munīndra

Wylie:
  • thub dbang
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • munīndra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixteenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­357

Muni­śrīkūṭavega­saṃkusuma

Wylie:
  • thub pa dpal brtsegs shugs kyi me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ་དཔལ་བརྩེགས་ཤུགས་ཀྱི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • muni­śrīkūṭavega­saṃkusuma

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­358

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 46 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • i.­27
  • i.­33
  • i.­54
  • 1.­5-6
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­88
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­84
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­153
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­299
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­343
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­534
  • 4.­550
  • 5.­57
  • 5.­103
  • 5.­114-115
  • 5.­120-121
  • 5.­125-126
  • 5.­141-142
  • 5.­145
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­85
  • n.­236
  • n.­421
  • n.­433
  • g.­134
  • g.­367
  • g.­376
  • g.­724
g.­359

Nāgadanta

Wylie:
  • klus byin
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgadanta

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-first) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­360

Nāganinardita

Wylie:
  • ’brug sgra bsgrags pa
Tibetan:
  • འབྲུག་སྒྲ་བསྒྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāganinardita

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­361

Nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa

Wylie:
  • glang po rnam par bsgrags pa’i dbang phyug dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་རྣམ་པར་བསྒྲགས་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa

The buddha who succeeds the Buddhas Akṣobhya and Suvarṇapuṣpa in the realm Abhirati, by then renamed Jayasoma, as prophesied of King Araṇemin’s eleventh son, Siṃha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­182
  • g.­5
  • g.­218
  • g.­455
  • g.­561
g.­362

Nāga­vivarjitakusumateja­rāja

Wylie:
  • klus spangs me tog gzi brjid rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུས་སྤངས་མེ་ཏོག་གཟི་བརྗིད་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga­vivarjitakusumateja­rāja

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­363

Nāgendravi­mukti­buddha­loka­sāgaralocanaśaila

Wylie:
  • klu dbang rnam grol sad byed ’jig rten rgya mtsho’i mig gi ri bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ་དབང་རྣམ་གྲོལ་སད་བྱེད་འཇིག་རྟེན་རྒྱ་མཚོའི་མིག་གི་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgendravi­mukti­buddha­loka­sāgaralocanaśaila

One of the two names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for a group of a thousand buddhas, with presumably five hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­146
g.­364

Nakṣatra­vibhavakīrti

Wylie:
  • skar ma rnam ’jig grags pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་རྣམ་འཇིག་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nakṣatra­vibhavakīrti

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­365

Nakṣatra­vidhāna­kīrti

Wylie:
  • rgyu skar cho ga grags pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་སྐར་ཆོ་ག་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nakṣatra­vidhānakīrti

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­366

Namajyoti

Wylie:
  • skar ma ’dud
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་འདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • namajyoti

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­367

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

One of the eight great nāga kings.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 4.­153
g.­368

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­369

Nārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa

An alternate name for Viṣṇu (khyab ’jug).

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 2.­51
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­362
  • 4.­371
  • n.­11
  • n.­332
g.­370

Nārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirteenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­371

Nārāyaṇagarbha

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇagarbha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­372

Nārāyaṇa­vijita­garbha

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu’i rnam par rgyal ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུའི་རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa­vijita­garbha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­144
  • n.­11
g.­373

Nārāyaṇa­vijita­garbha

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu’i rnam par rgyal ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུའི་རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa­vijita­garbha

The name given for a buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­374

Nardaścoca

Wylie:
  • zla bsgrags
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བསྒྲགས།
Sanskrit:
  • nardaścoca

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees. Note that the Tibetan zla bsgrags would better match the Sanskrit nardacandra, but the attested Sanskrit instead reads Nardaścoca, which we have chosen to preserve here.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­375

Nerava

Wylie:
  • mig can
Tibetan:
  • མིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • nerava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­376

Nidhisaṃdarśana

Wylie:
  • gter ston
Tibetan:
  • གཏེར་སྟོན།
Sanskrit:
  • nidhisaṃdarśana

A previous life of Śākyamuni as a nāga king.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­141
  • n.­433
g.­377

night-flowering jasmine

Wylie:
  • pa ri ya tra ka
Tibetan:
  • པ་རི་ཡ་ཏྲ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • pārijātaka

Nyctanthes arbor tristis. Also known as coral jasmine, parijat, parijatha, and shephalika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­389
  • 4.­394
g.­378

Nīlagandha­prabhāsavi­raja

Wylie:
  • dri sngo snang ba rdul bral
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་སྔོ་སྣང་བ་རྡུལ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • nīlagandha­prabhāsavi­raja

The eastern realm in which the seventh son of King Araṇemin will become a buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­121
  • 4.­125
  • 4.­134
  • n.­225
g.­379

Nimi

Wylie:
  • mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • nimi

The second of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin, who in becoming a bodhisattva is given the name Mahāsthāmaprāpta, and as such in the future will be in Sukhāvatī as that bodhisattva when his father becomes the Buddha Amitābha. He will eventually become in that realm the Buddha Supra­tiṣṭhita­guṇa­maṇikūṭa­rāja.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 3.­120
  • 4.­38-39
  • n.­155
  • g.­612
g.­380

Nirmāṇarata

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarata

The fifth (counting from the lowest) of the six paradises in the desire realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • g.­609
g.­381

nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirvāṇa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Sanskrit, the term nirvāṇa literally means “extinguishment” and the Tibetan mya ngan las ’das pa literally means “gone beyond sorrow.” As a general term, it refers to the cessation of all suffering, afflicted mental states (kleśa), and causal processes (karman) that lead to rebirth and suffering in cyclic existence, as well as to the state in which all such rebirth and suffering has permanently ceased.

More specifically, three main types of nirvāṇa are identified. (1) The first type of nirvāṇa, called nirvāṇa with remainder (sopadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), is the state in which arhats or buddhas have attained awakening but are still dependent on the conditioned aggregates until their lifespan is exhausted. (2) At the end of life, given that there are no more causes for rebirth, these aggregates cease and no new aggregates arise. What occurs then is called nirvāṇa without remainder ( anupadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), which refers to the unconditioned element (dhātu) of nirvāṇa in which there is no remainder of the aggregates. (3) The Mahāyāna teachings distinguish the final nirvāṇa of buddhas from that of arhats, the nirvāṇa of arhats not being considered ultimate. The buddhas attain what is called nonabiding nirvāṇa (apratiṣṭhitanirvāṇa), which transcends the extremes of saṃsāra and nirvāṇa, i.e., existence and peace. This is the nirvāṇa that is the goal of the Mahāyāna path.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • i.­26
  • i.­50
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­78
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­55
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­106-107
  • 4.­217
  • 4.­227
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­277-278
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­330
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­338
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­384-385
  • 4.­410
  • 4.­544
  • 5.­54-55
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­84-85
  • g.­5
  • g.­72
  • g.­249
  • g.­623
g.­382

Niryūhavijṛṃbhita

Wylie:
  • ba gam gyis bsgyings pa
Tibetan:
  • བ་གམ་གྱིས་བསྒྱིངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • niryūhavijṛṃbhita

A realm to the south of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm in which resides the Buddha Siṃhavijṛṃbhiteśvararāja.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­479
g.­383

Nyagrodharāja

Wylie:
  • n+ya gro dha rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ནྱ་གྲོ་དྷ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nyagrodharāja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­384

outflows

Wylie:
  • zag pa
Tibetan:
  • ཟག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āsrava

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “to flow” or “to ooze.” Mental defilements or contaminations that “flow out” toward the objects of cyclic existence, binding us to them. Vasubandhu offers two alternative explanations of this term: “They cause beings to remain (āsayanti) within saṃsāra” and “They flow from the Summit of Existence down to the Avīci hell, out of the six wounds that are the sense fields” (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya 5.40; Pradhan 1967, p. 308). The Summit of Existence (bhavāgra, srid pa’i rtse mo) is the highest point within saṃsāra, while the hell called Avīci (mnar med) is the lowest; the six sense fields (āyatana, skye mched) here refer to the five sense faculties plus the mind, i.e., the six internal sense fields.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­163
g.­385

Padmā

Wylie:
  • pad ma
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmā

The southeastern realm of the Buddha Padmottara.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23-24
  • 1.­13
  • 1.­16
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­25
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­7-8
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18-19
  • 2.­36
  • 4.­87
  • 4.­92
  • g.­98
  • g.­166
g.­386

Padmottara

Wylie:
  • pad ma dam pa
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmottara

The buddha whom the bodhisattva Gaganamudra becomes, who is a contemporary of Śākyamuni and seen in his southeastern realm by many of Śākyamuni’s bodhisattva disciples.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23-24
  • i.­37
  • 1.­8-11
  • 1.­16
  • 1.­19-26
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­17-18
  • 2.­21
  • 2.­36
  • 4.­92
  • n.­6
  • g.­1
  • g.­98
  • g.­106
  • g.­166
  • g.­385
  • g.­462
g.­387

Padmottara

Wylie:
  • pad ma dam pa
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmottara

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­388

Palāmaratna­vṛkṣa­ratna

Wylie:
  • rin chen ljon shing ’bras bu dpag med rin po che
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་ལྗོན་ཤིང་འབྲས་བུ་དཔག་མེད་རིན་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • palāmaratna­vṛkṣa­ratna

A southern buddha realm that Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­389

Pāṃśu

Wylie:
  • rdul gyi ri
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་གྱི་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṃśuparvatāḥ

Unidentified mountains.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­11
g.­390

Pāṃśughoṣa

Wylie:
  • rdul dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṃśughoṣa

An ājīvika ascetic who asks King Puṇyabala, a previous life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, for his eyes and skin.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­64
  • 5.­66
  • 5.­71
g.­391

Pañcaśikha

Wylie:
  • gtsug phud lnga pa
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཕུད་ལྔ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaśikha

A gandharva prominent in early Buddhism who is featured on early stūpa reliefs playing a lute and singing.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­57
  • 6.­22-23
  • 6.­25
g.­392

paṇḍita

Wylie:
  • mkhas pa
Tibetan:
  • མཁས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • paṇḍita

An official title for a learned scholar in India.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • g.­222
g.­393

Paṅgagaṇa

Wylie:
  • grum por ’grang ba
Tibetan:
  • གྲུམ་པོར་འགྲང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • paṅgagaṇa

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­394

Pāracintin

Wylie:
  • pha rol sems
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • pāracintin

A śakra deity who prays to be Samudrareṇu’s disciple with miraculous powers when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Maudgalyāyana.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­530
g.­395

Para­nirmitavaśavartin

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • para­nirmitavaśavartin

The principal deity in the Para­nirmitavaśavartin paradise, which is the highest in the desire realm.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­92
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­102
  • 3.­104
  • 3.­106-107
  • 4.­5
g.­396

parinirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • yongs su mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • parinirvāṇa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This refers to what occurs at the end of an arhat’s or a buddha’s life. When nirvāṇa is attained at awakening, whether as an arhat or buddha, all suffering, afflicted mental states (kleśa), and causal processes (karman) that lead to rebirth and suffering in cyclic existence have ceased, but due to previously accumulated karma, the aggregates of that life remain and must still exhaust themselves. It is only at the end of life that these cease, and since no new aggregates arise, the arhat or buddha is said to attain parinirvāṇa, meaning “complete” or “final” nirvāṇa. This is synonymous with the attainment of nirvāṇa without remainder (anupadhiśeṣanirvāṇa).

According to the Mahāyāna view of a single vehicle (ekayāna), the arhat’s parinirvāṇa at death, despite being so called, is not final. The arhat must still enter the bodhisattva path and reach buddhahood (see Unraveling the Intent, Toh 106, 7.14.) On the other hand, the parinirvāṇa of a buddha, ultimately speaking, should be understood as a display manifested for the benefit of beings; see The Teaching on the Extraordinary Transformation That Is the Miracle of Attaining the Buddha’s Powers (Toh 186), 1.32.

The term parinirvāṇa is also associated specifically with the passing away of the Buddha Śākyamuni, in Kuśinagara, in northern India.

Located in 50 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­14
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­39
  • 2.­42
  • 2.­53
  • 3.­47
  • 3.­58
  • 4.­7-8
  • 4.­13-14
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­103
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­182
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­280
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­318
  • 4.­363
  • 4.­386-388
  • 4.­396
  • 4.­399
  • 4.­404
  • 4.­408
  • 4.­526
  • 4.­545
  • 4.­553
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­54-55
  • 5.­80
  • 6.­1
  • g.­42
  • g.­344
  • g.­721
g.­397

perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāramitā

The six perfections of generosity, conduct, patience, diligence, meditation, and wisdom.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 4.­47
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­61
  • 4.­73
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­149
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­250
  • 4.­275
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­318
  • 4.­324
  • 4.­374
  • 4.­382-383
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­398-399
  • 4.­404
  • 4.­535
  • 5.­106
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­49
  • 6.­73
  • 6.­85
  • n.­4
g.­398

piśāca

Wylie:
  • sha za
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśāca

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that, like several other classes of nonhuman beings, take spontaneous birth. Ranking below rākṣasas, they are less powerful and more akin to pretas. They are said to dwell in impure and perilous places, where they feed on impure things, including flesh. This could account for the name piśāca, which possibly derives from √piś, to carve or chop meat, as reflected also in the Tibetan sha za, “meat eater.” They are often described as having an unpleasant appearance, and at times they appear with animal bodies. Some possess the ability to enter the dead bodies of humans, thereby becoming so-called vetāla, to touch whom is fatal.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­36
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­363
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­550
  • 6.­85
  • n.­80
g.­399

piṭaka

Wylie:
  • sde snod
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་སྣོད།
Sanskrit:
  • piṭaka

A collection of canonical texts according to subject, the piṭakas are usually Vinaya, Sūtra and Abhidharma. There is also, as in this sūtra, the collection of Mahāyana teachings known as the bodhisattvapiṭaka. Originates from the term “baskets” originally used to contain these collections.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­48
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­390
  • g.­715
g.­400

powers

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • indriya

The five powers: faith, mindfulness, diligence, samādhi, and wisdom.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8-9
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­25
  • 2.­13
  • 2.­70
  • 3.­46
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­263
  • 4.­329
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­372
  • 4.­379
  • 4.­476
  • 4.­496
  • 4.­499
  • 4.­530
  • 5.­30
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­12
  • n.­86
  • g.­140
  • g.­151
  • g.­340
  • g.­394
  • g.­590
  • g.­638
g.­401

Prabhākara

Wylie:
  • ’od byed
Tibetan:
  • འོད་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhākara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­402

Prabhāketu

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal tog
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • prabhāketu

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­403

Prabhāsavirajaḥ­samucchraya­gandheśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • snang ba rdul bral spos mtho dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་བ་རྡུལ་བྲལ་སྤོས་མཐོ་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhāsavirajaḥ­samucchraya­gandheśvara­rāja

The buddha whom the seventh son of King Araṇemin is prophesied to become.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­121
  • 4.­134
  • g.­563
g.­404

Pradīpapradyota

Wylie:
  • sgron ma snang ba
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲོན་མ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pradīpapradyota

Śākyamuni’s previous life as a cakravartin who gave away everything including parts of his body.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­109
  • g.­60
  • g.­101
g.­405

Pradyota

Wylie:
  • mchog tu dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • མཆོག་ཏུ་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pradyota

The seventh buddha of the Bhadraka eon. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that an unnamed Veda-reciting pupil of Samudrareṇu will be the Buddha Pradyota.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­42
  • 4.­258
g.­406

Prahasitabāhu

Wylie:
  • rab tu lag brkyang
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་ལག་བརྐྱང་།
Sanskrit:
  • prahasitabāhu

A pupil of the Buddha Śākyamuni who is one of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­92
  • n.­419
  • g.­293
  • g.­666
g.­407

Prahī­ṇabhaya­ghoṣeśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • gya nom ’jigs med dbyangs kyi dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གྱ་ནོམ་འཇིགས་མེད་དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • prahī­ṇabhaya­ghoṣeśvara­rāja

The name of one thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­142
g.­408

Prajñādhara

Wylie:
  • shes rab ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñādhara

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Lokeśvararāja to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­481
g.­409

Prajñārciḥ­saṃkopita­daṣṭa

Wylie:
  • ’od zer kun nas ’khrugs ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་ཀུན་ནས་འཁྲུགས་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñārciḥ­saṃkopita­daṣṭa

One of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal the Buddha Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­83
  • 5.­92
  • g.­73
  • g.­617
g.­410

Prajñāvabhāsa

Wylie:
  • shes rab snang ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñāvabhāsa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­411

Prajñāvarman

Wylie:
  • pradz+nyA bar+ma
Tibetan:
  • པྲཛྙཱ་བརྨ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñāvarman

An Indian scholar who came to Tibet during the reign of Tri Songdetsen and was involved in the translation of this text. He is listed as a translator of seventy-seven works.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­412

Praṇāda

Wylie:
  • sgra rab
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • praṇāda

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­413

Praśamak­ṣamasuvicitra­jñāna­gandha­samavasaraṇa

Wylie:
  • rab tu zhi ba bzod pa’i ye shes shin tu ’byed pa’i dri la yang dag par gzhol ba
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་ཞི་བ་བཟོད་པའི་ཡེ་ཤེས་ཤིན་ཏུ་འབྱེད་པའི་དྲི་ལ་ཡང་དག་པར་གཞོལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • praśamak­ṣamasuvicitra­jñāna­gandha­samavasaraṇa

A vajra seat. “A Congregation of the Aromas of Variegated Wisdom and Tranquil Patience.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­64
g.­414

Prasphulitakusuma­vairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang mdzad me tog rab rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད་མེ་ཏོག་རབ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • prasphulitakusuma­vairocana

A buddha in a realm in the upward direction who sends bodhisattvas to make offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­483-484
  • 4.­487-488
  • 4.­493-494
  • 4.­496-497
  • g.­122
  • g.­511
  • g.­632
g.­415

Pratāpana

Wylie:
  • rab tu tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratāpana

The “very hot” hell; the seventh of the eight hot hells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­416

prātimokṣa vows

Wylie:
  • so sor thar pa'i sdom pa
  • so sor thar pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོར་ཐར་པའི་སྡོམ་པ།
  • སོ་སོར་ཐར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prātimokṣasaṃvara
  • prātimokṣa AD

The regulations and rules that constitute Buddhist discipline. The number and scope of the vows differs depending on one’s status (whether lay, novice monastic, or full monastic) and whether one is a monk or a nun.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­58
g.­417

pratyekabuddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • 1.­7
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­2
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­58
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­57
  • 4.­109
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­247-248
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­519
  • 4.­521
  • 5.­158
  • n.­29
  • g.­418
  • g.­528
g.­418

Pratyekabuddhayāna

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­buddhayāna

The way of the pratyekabuddha, particularly characterized by contemplation on the twelve phases of dependent origination.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­62
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­350
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­360
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­383
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­522-523
  • 4.­543
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­77
  • 5.­104-105
  • 5.­141
  • 5.­149-150
  • 5.­156
  • 6.­25
  • n.­115
  • n.­250
g.­419

Pravāḍodupānā

Wylie:
  • byi ru ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • བྱི་རུ་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pravāḍodupānā

A name of the Sahā realm in an earlier eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­147
  • 5.­152
g.­420

Pravaralocana

Wylie:
  • rab mchog spyan
Tibetan:
  • རབ་མཆོག་སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • pravaralocana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-fifth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­421

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • 2.­97-98
  • 2.­100-101
  • 3.­49
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­113
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­319
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­350
  • 4.­413
  • 6.­85
  • n.­17
  • n.­80
  • n.­82
  • n.­154
  • n.­392
  • g.­146
g.­422

Priyaprasanna

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba dang ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ་དང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • priyaprasanna

The 1,003rd of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­43
  • 4.­269
  • g.­690
g.­423

Puṇyabala

Wylie:
  • bsod nams stobs
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyabala

The Buddha Śākyamuni’s previous life as a caṇḍāla who became a cakravartin.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­50-51
  • 5.­61-64
  • 5.­67
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­71
  • g.­390
g.­424

Puṇyabala­sāla­rāja

Wylie:
  • bsod nams stobs sA la’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྟོབས་སཱ་ལའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyabala­sāla­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas. It is also the name given for a buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­144
  • 6.­43
g.­425

Pūrṇa

Wylie:
  • gang ba
Tibetan:
  • གང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa

The name of a māra who becomes a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­33
  • 3.­100
g.­426

Pūrṇa

Wylie:
  • gang ba
Tibetan:
  • གང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­427

pūtana

Wylie:
  • srul po
Tibetan:
  • སྲུལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūtana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of disease-causing spirits associated with cemeteries and dead bodies. The name probably derives from the Skt. pūta, “foul-smelling,” as reflected also in the Tib. srul po. The smell is variously described in the texts as resembling that of a billy goat or a crow. The morbid condition caused by the spirit shares its name and comes in various forms, with symptoms such as fever, vomiting, diarrhea, skin eruptions, and festering wounds, the latter possibly explaining the association with bad smells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­133
g.­428

Radiant Bull

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i khyu mchog
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་ཁྱུ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

One of the thirty million brahmin pupils of the brahmin Samudrareṇu, whom the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will become the Buddha Ratna­cchatrābhyudgata­raśmi in the realm Rutasañcaya.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­39
  • 4.­212
  • 4.­215
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­221-222
  • g.­448
  • g.­475
  • g.­476
g.­429

Rāgabhrama

Wylie:
  • ’dod chags mi gnas
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་ཆགས་མི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • rāgabhrama

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­430

Rahagarjita

Wylie:
  • gsang bsgrags
Tibetan:
  • གསང་བསྒྲགས།
Sanskrit:
  • rahagarjita

A bodhisattva sent by the Buddha Vimalateja­guṇa­rāja to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­15
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­36
g.­431

Rāhu

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhu

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­432

Rāhubala

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan stobs med
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན་སྟོབས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhubala

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­433

Rāhucitra

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan dgra med
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན་དགྲ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhucitra

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­434

Rāhula

Wylie:
  • sgra can zin
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཅན་ཟིན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhula

Son of Prince Siddhārtha Gautama, who, when the latter attained awakening as the Buddha Śākyamuni, became a monk and eventually one of his foremost śrāvaka disciples

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­382
g.­435

Rājadhāna

Wylie:
  • rgyal por gnas
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོར་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • rājadhāna

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­436

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23
  • 1.­2
g.­437

Rakṣaka

Wylie:
  • srung ba po
Tibetan:
  • སྲུང་བ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rakṣaka

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­438

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­79
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­413
  • 4.­550
  • 5.­106
  • 5.­114
  • 6.­23
g.­439

Rāndhava

Wylie:
  • nor bdag
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • rāndhava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­440

Raṇemin

Wylie:
  • g.yul gyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • གཡུལ་གྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • raṇemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­441

Raśmi

Wylie:
  • ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • raśmi

The name of a buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­36
  • 4.­14
  • g.­42
  • g.­721
g.­442

Raśmimaṇḍala­jyotiprabhāsa­rāja

Wylie:
  • ’od zer gyi dkyil ’khor snang ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་གྱི་དཀྱིལ་འཁོར་སྣང་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • raśmimaṇḍala­jyotiprabhāsa­rāja

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­443

Ratimegha

Wylie:
  • dga’ sprin
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་སྤྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratimegha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­444

Ratīśvara

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • ratīśvara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventieth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­445

Ratīśvara

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • ratīśvara

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­446

Ratīśvara­ghoṣa­jyoti

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba’i dbang phyug sgra dbyangs ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་སྒྲ་དབྱངས་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • ratīśvara­ghoṣa­jyoti

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­447

Ratnacandra

Wylie:
  • rin chen zla ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnacandra

The buddha in the eastern realm Ratnavicayā at the time of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­462-464
  • 4.­468-469
  • 4.­475-477
  • g.­102
  • g.­456
  • g.­463
g.­448

Ratna­cchatrābhyudgata­raśmi

Wylie:
  • rin po che chen po’i gdugs mngon par ’phags pa’i ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་ཆེན་པོའི་གདུགས་མངོན་པར་འཕགས་པའི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­cchatrābhyudgata­raśmi

The name that the Buddha Ratnagharba prophesies that Radiant Bull, one of the thirty million pupils of Samudrareṇu, will have at buddhahood.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­39
  • 4.­221
  • g.­428
  • g.­475
  • g.­476
g.­449

Ratna­cchatrābhyudgatāva­bhāsa

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­cchatrābhyudgatāva­bhāsa

A buddha in the distant past in whose presence many beings, including the Buddha Jyotīrasa, developed the aspiration to become a buddha during a kaliyuga. Note that the Tibetan translation of the name differs from the Sanskrit form found in the available Sanskrit manuscripts.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­515-516
g.­450

Ratna­dhvaja

Wylie:
  • rin chen rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­dhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­451

Ratnagarbha

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnagarbha

One of the eighty-one sons of Samudrareṇu, the chief court priest of King Araṇemin. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies the buddhahood of Samudrareṇu’s thirty million pupils.

Located in 414 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2-3
  • i.­14
  • i.­28-31
  • i.­33-34
  • i.­36-38
  • i.­41
  • i.­43-47
  • i.­49-50
  • 3.­7-9
  • 3.­11-13
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­24-25
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­33-34
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­94
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­123-124
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­22-23
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­93
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­122-123
  • 4.­138
  • 4.­141
  • 4.­148
  • 4.­155
  • 4.­174
  • 4.­179
  • 4.­181-182
  • 4.­184-185
  • 4.­187-191
  • 4.­196-197
  • 4.­199-200
  • 4.­202-203
  • 4.­205-206
  • 4.­208
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­221-222
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­228
  • 4.­230
  • 4.­232-237
  • 4.­240-242
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­269
  • 4.­272
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­284-285
  • 4.­289
  • 4.­293
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­308
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­460
  • 4.­464
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­469
  • 4.­474-476
  • 4.­484
  • 4.­486
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­492-494
  • 4.­496
  • 4.­499-504
  • 4.­514-515
  • 4.­536-537
  • 4.­539
  • 4.­543-544
  • 4.­547
  • 4.­554
  • 5.­1-2
  • 5.­47
  • 5.­50-51
  • 5.­53-55
  • 5.­57
  • 5.­72
  • n.­87
  • n.­117
  • n.­285
  • n.­375
  • g.­2
  • g.­4
  • g.­6
  • g.­7
  • g.­8
  • g.­9
  • g.­12
  • g.­21
  • g.­23
  • g.­31
  • g.­36
  • g.­37
  • g.­43
  • g.­46
  • g.­52
  • g.­56
  • g.­57
  • g.­62
  • g.­64
  • g.­66
  • g.­70
  • g.­71
  • g.­74
  • g.­81
  • g.­85
  • g.­86
  • g.­90
  • g.­91
  • g.­92
  • g.­96
  • g.­102
  • g.­108
  • g.­116
  • g.­122
  • g.­124
  • g.­125
  • g.­126
  • g.­127
  • g.­129
  • g.­130
  • g.­135
  • g.­137
  • g.­138
  • g.­167
  • g.­170
  • g.­171
  • g.­173
  • g.­174
  • g.­175
  • g.­178
  • g.­179
  • g.­186
  • g.­187
  • g.­188
  • g.­189
  • g.­194
  • g.­207
  • g.­209
  • g.­210
  • g.­214
  • g.­217
  • g.­220
  • g.­223
  • g.­226
  • g.­227
  • g.­228
  • g.­230
  • g.­231
  • g.­232
  • g.­233
  • g.­234
  • g.­235
  • g.­236
  • g.­237
  • g.­238
  • g.­239
  • g.­240
  • g.­241
  • g.­243
  • g.­246
  • g.­247
  • g.­248
  • g.­249
  • g.­250
  • g.­251
  • g.­252
  • g.­254
  • g.­256
  • g.­260
  • g.­266
  • g.­267
  • g.­268
  • g.­269
  • g.­270
  • g.­271
  • g.­273
  • g.­277
  • g.­280
  • g.­281
  • g.­282
  • g.­284
  • g.­285
  • g.­288
  • g.­290
  • g.­294
  • g.­297
  • g.­301
  • g.­303
  • g.­307
  • g.­309
  • g.­311
  • g.­313
  • g.­316
  • g.­318
  • g.­320
  • g.­323
  • g.­327
  • g.­332
  • g.­336
  • g.­338
  • g.­339
  • g.­348
  • g.­349
  • g.­356
  • g.­357
  • g.­359
  • g.­362
  • g.­363
  • g.­364
  • g.­368
  • g.­370
  • g.­371
  • g.­372
  • g.­382
  • g.­383
  • g.­401
  • g.­405
  • g.­407
  • g.­408
  • g.­410
  • g.­412
  • g.­414
  • g.­420
  • g.­424
  • g.­426
  • g.­428
  • g.­442
  • g.­443
  • g.­444
  • g.­447
  • g.­450
  • g.­453
  • g.­455
  • g.­456
  • g.­458
  • g.­459
  • g.­461
  • g.­463
  • g.­465
  • g.­469
  • g.­471
  • g.­475
  • g.­476
  • g.­478
  • g.­482
  • g.­483
  • g.­484
  • g.­488
  • g.­491
  • g.­492
  • g.­499
  • g.­502
  • g.­503
  • g.­510
  • g.­511
  • g.­519
  • g.­522
  • g.­523
  • g.­524
  • g.­525
  • g.­526
  • g.­527
  • g.­530
  • g.­532
  • g.­536
  • g.­542
  • g.­549
  • g.­558
  • g.­559
  • g.­560
  • g.­562
  • g.­564
  • g.­565
  • g.­567
  • g.­568
  • g.­569
  • g.­572
  • g.­577
  • g.­578
  • g.­579
  • g.­580
  • g.­587
  • g.­592
  • g.­595
  • g.­596
  • g.­597
  • g.­601
  • g.­602
  • g.­604
  • g.­606
  • g.­607
  • g.­608
  • g.­611
  • g.­613
  • g.­616
  • g.­618
  • g.­620
  • g.­625
  • g.­627
  • g.­628
  • g.­631
  • g.­632
  • g.­647
  • g.­648
  • g.­661
  • g.­662
  • g.­663
  • g.­674
  • g.­677
  • g.­678
  • g.­680
  • g.­681
  • g.­682
  • g.­687
  • g.­688
  • g.­690
  • g.­692
  • g.­694
  • g.­695
  • g.­696
  • g.­697
  • g.­698
  • g.­699
  • g.­701
  • g.­703
  • g.­706
  • g.­708
  • g.­709
  • g.­712
  • g.­714
  • g.­717
  • g.­719
  • g.­720
  • g.­722
  • g.­725
  • g.­729
  • g.­730
  • g.­731
  • g.­733
  • g.­735
  • g.­736
  • g.­748
  • g.­749
g.­452

Ratnagiri

Wylie:
  • rin chen ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnagiri

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­46
g.­453

Ratna­guṇa­saṃnicaya

Wylie:
  • yon tan rin chen yang dag bstsags
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་རིན་ཆེན་ཡང་དག་བསྩགས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­guṇa­saṃnicaya

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­454

Ratna­guṇa­vijṛmbhita­saṃcaya

Wylie:
  • yon tan bsgyings pa yang dag bsags
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་བསྒྱིངས་པ་ཡང་དག་བསགས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­guṇa­vijṛmbhitasaṃcaya

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­455

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaketu

The bodhisattva who received this name from the Buddha Ratnagarbha when he was the eleventh son of King Araṇemin. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesied he will succeed the buddhas Akṣobhya and Suvarṇapuṣpa as the Buddha Nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­182-185
  • 4.­439
  • g.­561
g.­456

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaketu

The name of a bodhisattva who comes to the Buddha Ratnagarbha from the realm of the Buddha Ratnacandra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­463
  • 4.­476
g.­457

Ratnakūṭa

Wylie:
  • rin po che brtsegs pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་བརྩེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnakūṭa

The buddha that Samudrareṇu’s oldest son Samudreśvara is prophesied to become.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­197
g.­458

Ratnaśaila

Wylie:
  • rin chen ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśaila

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the eleventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­459

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-second) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­460

Ratnatalanāgendra

Wylie:
  • klu dbang rin chen ngos
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ་དབང་རིན་ཆེན་ངོས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­talanāgendra

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­461

Ratnāvabhāsa

Wylie:
  • rin chen snang ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnāvabhāsa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­462

Ratnavairocana

Wylie:
  • rin po che rnam par snang byed
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnavairocana

The bodhisattva who asks the Buddha to teach about Buddha Padmottara.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23-25
  • 1.­9
  • 1.­11-12
  • 1.­21-22
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­55
g.­463

Ratnavicayā

Wylie:
  • rin po che bstsags pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་བསྩགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnavicayā

The eastern realm of the Buddha Ratnacandra during the lifetime of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­462
  • 4.­476
  • g.­447
g.­464

Ratnavisabha

Wylie:
  • rin chen khyu mchog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་ཁྱུ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnavisabha

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­465

Ratneśvara

Wylie:
  • rin chen dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • ratneśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­466

Ratneśvaraghoṣa

Wylie:
  • rin chen dbang phyug dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་དབང་ཕྱུག་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratneśvaraghoṣa

The name of a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­36
  • 4.­14
  • g.­42
g.­467

Reṇaja

Wylie:
  • glang po ’thob
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་འཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • reṇaja

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­468

roca

Wylie:
  • mdog mdzes
  • mdog mdzes chen po
Tibetan:
  • མདོག་མཛེས།
  • མདོག་མཛེས་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • roca
  • mahāroca

Unidentified flowers.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­389
g.­469

Roca

Wylie:
  • gsal mdzad
Tibetan:
  • གསལ་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • roca

The last buddha of the Bhadraka eon, which according to The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra is the 1,005th buddha. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesied that the youngest of the thousand Veda-reciting pupils of the brahmin Samudrareṇu would be the Buddha Roca.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­44
  • 4.­282
  • g.­74
  • g.­307
g.­470

Roca

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • roca

The brahmin who asks King Ambara for his feet.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­130
g.­471

Rohiṇa

Wylie:
  • snar ma skyes
Tibetan:
  • སྣར་མ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • rohiṇa

A deva who made offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­90
g.­472

root downfall

Wylie:
  • ltung ba’i rtsa ba
Tibetan:
  • ལྟུང་བའི་རྩ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mūlāpatti

For a monk these would be breaking the vows of not killing, not stealing, celibacy, and Dharma lies.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­151
  • 4.­360
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­525
  • 4.­546
  • 4.­548
g.­473

ṛṣi

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

An ancient Indian spiritual title, often translated as “sage” or “seer.” The title is particularly used for divinely inspired individuals credited with creating the foundations of Indian culture. The term is also applied to Śākyamuni and other realized Buddhist figures.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­37
  • 4.­238
  • 4.­300
  • 4.­303
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­347
  • 5.­113-114
  • 5.­120-121
  • 5.­158
  • 6.­88-90
  • n.­426
  • n.­428
  • g.­60
  • g.­346
g.­474

Rūḍhavaḍa

Wylie:
  • shing pa ta skye ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་པ་ཏ་སྐྱེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • rūḍhavaḍa

A name of Jambudvīpa in an earlier eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­141-142
  • n.­431
g.­475

Rutaprabhāsa

Wylie:
  • sgra snang
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྣང་།
Sanskrit:
  • rutaprabhāsa

The name of the eon in which, according to the prophecy of the Buddha Ratnagarbha, the young brahmin Radiant Bull will become the Buddha Ratna­cchatrābhyudgata­raśmi in the realm Rutasañcaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­221
g.­476

Rutasañcaya

Wylie:
  • sgra yang dag par bstsags pa
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཡང་དག་པར་བསྩགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • rutasañcaya

The realm in which the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies Samudrareṇu’s pupil Radiant Bull will become the Buddha Ratna­cchatrābhyudgata­raśmi.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­221
  • g.­428
  • g.­475
g.­477

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­478

Sāgaradhvaja

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgaradhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­479

Sahā

Wylie:
  • mi mjed
Tibetan:
  • མི་མཇེད།
Sanskrit:
  • sahā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name for our world system, the universe of a thousand million worlds, or trichiliocosm, in which the four-continent world is located. Each trichiliocosm is ruled by a god Brahmā; thus, in this context, he bears the title of Sahāṃpati, Lord of Sahā. The world system of Sahā, or Sahālokadhātu, is also described as the buddhafield of the Buddha Śākyamuni where he teaches the Dharma to beings.

The name Sahā possibly derives from the Sanskrit √sah, “to bear, endure, or withstand.” It is often interpreted as alluding to the inhabitants of this world being able to endure the suffering they encounter. The Tibetan translation, mi mjed, follows along the same lines. It literally means “not painful,” in the sense that beings here are able to bear the suffering they experience.

Located in 68 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­40
  • 1.­3
  • 2.­41
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­241
  • 4.­276
  • 4.­307
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­332
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­337-339
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­346
  • 4.­361
  • 4.­363
  • 4.­389
  • 4.­391-393
  • 4.­525-526
  • 5.­105
  • 6.­8-9
  • 6.­11-17
  • 6.­19
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­28-30
  • 6.­32-34
  • 6.­36-37
  • 6.­40
  • 6.­45
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­52-54
  • 6.­56-60
  • 6.­63-64
  • 6.­66
  • 6.­68
  • n.­53
  • g.­45
  • g.­104
  • g.­169
  • g.­419
  • g.­643
  • g.­705
g.­480

Sahetu­kṛṣṇa­vidhvaṃsana­rāja

Wylie:
  • nag po rnam par ’joms pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ་རྣམ་པར་འཇོམས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sahetu­kṛṣṇa­vidhvaṃsana­rāja

The name of the bodhisattva Sārakusumita on becoming a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­82
  • g.­481
g.­481

Sahetusaṃskarṣana

Wylie:
  • rgyu bcas yang dag ’dren
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་བཅས་ཡང་དག་འདྲེན།
Sanskrit:
  • sahetusaṃskarṣana

The northern realm in which the bodhisattva Sārakusumita became the Buddha Sahetu­kṛṣṇa­vidhvaṃsana­rāja.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­82
g.­482

Sahita

Wylie:
  • phan bcas
Tibetan:
  • ཕན་བཅས།
Sanskrit:
  • sahita

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirtieth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­483

Śailakalpa

Wylie:
  • ri bo lta bu
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śailakalpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­484

Śailarāja

Wylie:
  • ri bo’i rgyal
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོའི་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śailarāja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifth) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­485

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the gods in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (trāyastriṃśa). Alternatively known as Indra, the deity that is called “lord of the gods” dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields the thunderbolt. The Tibetan translation brgya byin (meaning “one hundred sacrifices”) is based on an etymology that śakra is an abbreviation of śata-kratu, one who has performed a hundred sacrifices. Each world with a central Sumeru has a Śakra. Also known by other names such as Kauśika, Devendra, and Śacipati.

Located in 40 passages in the translation:

  • i.­30
  • i.­48
  • i.­57
  • 1.­5
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­40-41
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­91-92
  • 3.­94
  • 3.­102-103
  • 3.­106-107
  • 4.­294
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­502
  • 4.­530-531
  • 5.­102
  • 5.­120
  • 5.­147
  • 6.­22-24
  • 6.­26
  • n.­115
  • n.­119
  • n.­380
  • n.­426
  • g.­107
  • g.­197
  • g.­278
  • g.­394
  • g.­529
  • g.­552
  • g.­658
g.­486

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 202 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1-2
  • i.­1-4
  • i.­9
  • i.­17
  • i.­23-26
  • i.­39-41
  • i.­47-48
  • i.­51
  • i.­56-58
  • 4.­204
  • 4.­526
  • 4.­553
  • 5.­49-50
  • 6.­8-9
  • 6.­11-15
  • 6.­17-21
  • 6.­23-25
  • 6.­27-29
  • 6.­31-32
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­40
  • 6.­44-45
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­49-50
  • 6.­52
  • 6.­54-57
  • 6.­59
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­63-64
  • 6.­69
  • 6.­78
  • n.­278
  • n.­285
  • n.­376-377
  • n.­379
  • n.­381-384
  • g.­3
  • g.­18
  • g.­22
  • g.­25
  • g.­34
  • g.­48
  • g.­54
  • g.­58
  • g.­84
  • g.­88
  • g.­97
  • g.­99
  • g.­101
  • g.­107
  • g.­111
  • g.­115
  • g.­118
  • g.­120
  • g.­128
  • g.­132
  • g.­133
  • g.­141
  • g.­143
  • g.­144
  • g.­166
  • g.­177
  • g.­190
  • g.­192
  • g.­200
  • g.­212
  • g.­213
  • g.­219
  • g.­245
  • g.­253
  • g.­258
  • g.­261
  • g.­272
  • g.­278
  • g.­289
  • g.­291
  • g.­293
  • g.­295
  • g.­298
  • g.­299
  • g.­310
  • g.­323
  • g.­328
  • g.­333
  • g.­335
  • g.­341
  • g.­343
  • g.­345
  • g.­346
  • g.­347
  • g.­355
  • g.­365
  • g.­373
  • g.­374
  • g.­376
  • g.­386
  • g.­387
  • g.­388
  • g.­390
  • g.­394
  • g.­404
  • g.­406
  • g.­409
  • g.­423
  • g.­424
  • g.­430
  • g.­434
  • g.­445
  • g.­452
  • g.­454
  • g.­460
  • g.­464
  • g.­473
  • g.­477
  • g.­487
  • g.­490
  • g.­498
  • g.­505
  • g.­507
  • g.­508
  • g.­510
  • g.­512
  • g.­513
  • g.­514
  • g.­516
  • g.­520
  • g.­524
  • g.­529
  • g.­537
  • g.­538
  • g.­539
  • g.­540
  • g.­545
  • g.­547
  • g.­551
  • g.­552
  • g.­558
  • g.­570
  • g.­594
  • g.­603
  • g.­619
  • g.­622
  • g.­624
  • g.­629
  • g.­630
  • g.­635
  • g.­652
  • g.­658
  • g.­665
  • g.­670
  • g.­683
  • g.­686
  • g.­700
  • g.­702
  • g.­704
  • g.­707
  • g.­710
  • g.­711
  • g.­716
  • g.­719
  • g.­726
  • g.­727
  • g.­730
  • g.­734
g.­487

Sālajaya­bindu­rājā

Wylie:
  • sA la’i thigs pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་ཐིགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālajaya­bindu­rājā

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­488

Sālendra

Wylie:
  • sA la’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālendra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­489

Sālendrarāja

Wylie:
  • sA la’i dbang po’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālendrarāja

A buddha of the distant past of whom the bodhisattva Maitreya states he was a pupil.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­26
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­78
  • g.­544
g.­490

Sālendrarāja

Wylie:
  • sA la’i dbang po’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālendrarāja

The name of a buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­491

Śālendrarāja

Wylie:
  • ri dbang rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རི་དབང་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śālendrarāja

The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that Vāyuviṣṇu, the eldest of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins, will become a buddha with this name.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­228
g.­492

Sālendrasiṃha­vigraha

Wylie:
  • sAla’i dbang po seng ge’i sgra
Tibetan:
  • སཱལའི་དབང་པོ་སེང་གེའི་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālendrasiṃha­vigraha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­493

samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 130 passages in the translation:

  • i.­24
  • i.­47
  • i.­50
  • i.­57
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­7
  • 1.­22
  • 1.­24-25
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­15
  • 2.­22
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­37-39
  • 2.­51-53
  • 2.­68
  • 2.­70
  • 2.­90-91
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­101
  • 3.­46
  • 3.­56
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­124
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­5-7
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­88-90
  • 4.­97-98
  • 4.­102-104
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­112
  • 4.­115-116
  • 4.­118-119
  • 4.­126-132
  • 4.­135
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­164
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­253
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­336-338
  • 4.­341-342
  • 4.­344
  • 4.­358
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­386
  • 4.­424
  • 4.­440
  • 4.­464
  • 4.­467
  • 4.­469
  • 4.­475
  • 4.­484
  • 4.­486
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­493
  • 4.­496
  • 4.­499
  • 4.­501
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3-4
  • 5.­48-50
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­82
  • 5.­154
  • 6.­22-24
  • 6.­66
  • 6.­86
  • n.­11
  • n.­30
  • n.­33
  • n.­56
  • n.­226-227
  • n.­283
  • n.­325
  • n.­327-328
  • n.­330-331
  • n.­333
  • n.­335-338
  • n.­341
  • n.­356
  • n.­395-397
  • n.­399-400
  • n.­407
  • g.­10
  • g.­400
g.­494

Samantabhadra

Wylie:
  • kun tu bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantabhadra

One of the eight principal bodhisattvas who figures strongly in the Gaṇḍavyūha, which is the final chapter of the Avataṃsaka Sūtra, and also in the Lotus Sūtra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 4.­189
  • 4.­433
g.­495

Samantabhadra

Wylie:
  • kun tu bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantabhadra

The name of the bodhisattva the eighth son of King Araṇemin will become.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­136-138
  • 4.­140-141
  • g.­27
  • g.­242
  • g.­244
g.­496

Samantabhadra

Wylie:
  • kun tu bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantabhadra

The name of the buddha whom the fourth son of King Araṇemin will become. Distinct from the primordial buddha with the same name in the Nyingma tradition.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­80
  • g.­35
  • g.­41
g.­497

Samantadarśin

Wylie:
  • kun tu gzigs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • samantadarśin

The buddha whom the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī is prophesied to become.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­71
  • g.­198
g.­498

Samantagarbha

Wylie:
  • kun du snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དུ་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantagarbha

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­499

Samantaguptasāgara­rāja

Wylie:
  • kun sbed rgya mtsho’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་སྦེད་རྒྱ་མཚོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantaguptasāgara­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­500

Saman­taraśmya­bhyudgataśrīkūṭa­rāja

Wylie:
  • ’od zer kun nas ’phags pa dpal brtsegs rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་ཀུན་ནས་འཕགས་པ་དཔལ་བརྩེགས་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantaraśmyabhyudgataśrīkūṭa­rāja

The name of Avalokiteśvara when he succeeds the Buddha Amitābha as the next buddha in his realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­39
g.­501

śamatha

Wylie:
  • zhi gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • śamatha

One of the basic forms of Buddhist meditation, which focuses on calming the mind. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, with the other technique being vipaśyana.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­390
  • 5.­15
  • 5.­48
  • g.­718
g.­502

Saṃbhava

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’byung
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃbhava

The second of the brahmin Samudrareṇu’s eighty sons. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will become the Buddha Vairocanakusuma.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­202
  • g.­66
  • g.­667
g.­503

Saṃbhavapuṣpa

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’byung dang me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འབྱུང་དང་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • saṃbhavapuṣpa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-sixth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­504

Saṃghāta

Wylie:
  • bsdus gzhom
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུས་གཞོམ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃghāta

The third of the eight hot hells. The “crushing” hell.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­505

Saṃjīvana

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjīvana

An ājīvika ascetic who asks King Ambara, a previous life of Śākyamuni, for his genitalia. Also the name of an eastern buddha realm. The Sanskrit is also the name for one of the hells, which in Tibetan is rendered yang sos. In the traditional Buddhist list of eight hot hells, this is the “reviving” hell where beings are repeatedly killed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­133
g.­506

Saṃjīvana

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjīvana

The Sanskrit is the name for one of the hells, which in Tibetan is rendered yang sos. In the traditional Buddhist list of eight hot hells, this is the “reviving” hell where beings are repeatedly killed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­507

Saṃjīvana

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjīvana

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­508

Saṃjñāvikaraṇa­bhīṣma

Wylie:
  • mi ’gyur ’jigs byed
Tibetan:
  • མི་འགྱུར་འཇིགས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjñāvikaraṇa­bhīṣma

An ājīvika ascetic who prays to beg for everything from Samudrareṇu in his future lives and be his disciple when he is the Śākyamuni Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­535-536
  • 4.­541-542
g.­509

Saṃkaramardārci

Wylie:
  • dres spong ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • དྲེས་སྤོང་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkaramardārci

The name of the bodhisattva Dharaṇidatta when he became a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­80
  • g.­543
g.­510

Saṃkarṣana

Wylie:
  • yang dag ’dren
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་འདྲེན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkarṣana

A realm to the south of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm into which the Buddha Śākyamuni in his previous lives was repeatedly reborn as a caṇḍāla who becomes a cakravartin and gives away his body or parts of his body.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­58
  • 5.­73-75
g.­511

Saṃkusumitā

Wylie:
  • me tog kun tu rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་ཀུན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkusumitā

A realm above the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm in which resides the Buddha Prasphulitakusuma­vairocana.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­483
  • 4.­494
g.­512

Saṃpuṣpita

Wylie:
  • me tog kun tu rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་ཀུན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃpuṣpita

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­56
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­36-37
g.­513

Saṃrocana

Wylie:
  • legs dga’
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃrocana

A pupil of the Buddha Śākyamuni who is one of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal the Buddha Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­84
  • 5.­92
  • n.­419
  • g.­14
  • g.­293
  • g.­645
g.­514

Saṃrocanabuddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas yang dag ’dod
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཡང་དག་འདོད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃrocana­buddha

A bodhisattva sent by the Buddha Vigata­saṃtāpodbhava­vaiśravaṇasāla­rāja to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­51
  • 6.­58
g.­515

saṃsāra

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A state of involuntary existence conditioned by afflicted mental states and the imprint of past actions, characterized by suffering in a cycle of life, death, and rebirth. On its reversal, the contrasting state of nirvāṇa is attained, free from suffering and the processes of rebirth.

Located in 45 passages in the translation:

  • i.­16
  • i.­26
  • 2.­56-57
  • 2.­77-78
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­50
  • 3.­52-54
  • 4.­196
  • 4.­214-216
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­247-248
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­262
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­281
  • 4.­306-307
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­335-336
  • 4.­360
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­410
  • 4.­413
  • 4.­517
  • 4.­543
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­106
  • 6.­73
  • n.­272
  • g.­72
  • g.­158
g.­516

Saṃśrayasa

Wylie:
  • legs bcas
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་བཅས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃśrayasa

A previous eon, during which Śākyamuni was a cakravartin named Ambara.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­124
g.­517

Saṃtāpana

Wylie:
  • tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃtāpana

The sixth of the hot hells. Usually called Tāpana.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­411
g.­518

Saṃtāraṇa

Wylie:
  • kun nas sgrol ba
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་སྒྲོལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • santāraṇa

The name of an eon in the distant past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­76
g.­519

Saṃtīraṇa

Wylie:
  • yang dag rtog
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་རྟོག
Sanskrit:
  • saṃtīraṇa

The realm in which the Buddha Ratnagarbha lived and gave his prophecies.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­23
  • 4.­292
  • 4.­464
  • 4.­469
  • 4.­474
  • 4.­476
  • 4.­478-479
  • 4.­484
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­492
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­499
  • 4.­501
  • n.­292
g.­520

Saṃtoṣaṇa

Wylie:
  • mgu byed
Tibetan:
  • མགུ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃtoṣaṇa

A previous eon, during which Śākyamuni was a brahmin named Sūryamālagandha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­118
g.­521

Saṃtuṣita

Wylie:
  • yongs su dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃtuṣita

The principal deity in the paradise of the same name, Saṃtuṣita. More commonly referred to in English, as elsewhere in the sūtra, as Tuṣita.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­92
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­102
  • 3.­104
  • 3.­106-107
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­59
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­334
  • 4.­363
  • 5.­57
  • n.­193
g.­522

Samudragarbha

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samudragarbha

The son of the brahmin Samudrareṇu who became a buddha and was then known as Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­7
g.­523

Samudragarbha

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samudragarbha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twelfth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­524

Samudrareṇu

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho’i rdul
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོའི་རྡུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • samudrareṇu

The past life of the Buddha Śākyamuni as a brahmin priest, who is the principal figure in The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra. In this sūtra, he is the court priest of King Araṇemin and the father of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 127 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2-3
  • i.­6
  • i.­14
  • i.­28-34
  • i.­38-40
  • i.­43
  • i.­45-47
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­34-36
  • 3.­42
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­59
  • 3.­65
  • 3.­68
  • 3.­71-72
  • 3.­79-82
  • 3.­84-86
  • 3.­92-94
  • 3.­98
  • 3.­101-102
  • 3.­108-109
  • 3.­117-118
  • 3.­123-124
  • 3.­127-128
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­19-20
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­125
  • 4.­150
  • 4.­176
  • 4.­181
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­193
  • 4.­211
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­265
  • 4.­267
  • 4.­286-287
  • 4.­289
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­416
  • 4.­460
  • 4.­500
  • 4.­503-504
  • n.­11
  • n.­285
  • n.­375
  • g.­65
  • g.­66
  • g.­74
  • g.­107
  • g.­121
  • g.­207
  • g.­229
  • g.­261
  • g.­271
  • g.­274
  • g.­307
  • g.­310
  • g.­323
  • g.­394
  • g.­405
  • g.­428
  • g.­448
  • g.­451
  • g.­457
  • g.­469
  • g.­476
  • g.­502
  • g.­508
  • g.­522
  • g.­525
  • g.­529
  • g.­536
  • g.­551
  • g.­558
  • g.­562
  • g.­587
  • g.­659
  • g.­660
  • g.­667
  • g.­690
  • g.­693
  • g.­713
  • g.­719
  • g.­730
g.­525

Samudreśvarabhuvi

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho’i dbang phyug khyab bdag
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་ཁྱབ་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • samudreśvara­bhuvi

The eldest of the brahmin Samudrareṇu’s eighty sons and the brother of the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­191-192
  • 4.­196
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­202
g.­526

Saṃvṛtalocana

Wylie:
  • spyan bsdams
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་བསྡམས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃvṛtalocana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixth) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­527

Saṃvṛtīśvaraghoṣa

Wylie:
  • sdom pa’i dbang phyug dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • སྡོམ་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃvṛtīśvaraghoṣa

The name of one thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­142
g.­528

samyaksam­buddha

Wylie:
  • yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་རྫོགས་པའི་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • samyak­sambuddha

A perfect buddha: a buddha who teaches the Dharma and brings it into a world, as opposed to a pratyekabuddha, who does not teach the Dharma or bring it into a world.

Located in 92 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7-8
  • 1.­8-10
  • 1.­19-23
  • 1.­25-26
  • 2.­17-18
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­46-48
  • 2.­51
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­75-78
  • 2.­90
  • 2.­92
  • 3.­8-9
  • 3.­11-13
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­33-35
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­123-124
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­10-11
  • 4.­13-15
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­29-30
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­71
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­121
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­146
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­415
  • 4.­462
  • 4.­469
  • 4.­474
  • 4.­479
  • 4.­488
  • 4.­492
  • 4.­504
  • 4.­514-515
  • 4.­544
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­50
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­82-85
  • 6.­11
  • n.­117
g.­529

Sanema

Wylie:
  • mu khyud can
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sanema

A Śakra deity who prays to be Samudrareṇu’s disciple with wisdom when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Śāriputra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­530
g.­530

Sanetya­jñāna­saṃbhava

Wylie:
  • spyod bcas dang ye shes ’byung
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱོད་བཅས་དང་ཡེ་ཤེས་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sanetya­jñāna­saṃbhava

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-fifth) when he becomes a buddha. The Tibetan divides this into two names: Sanetya and Jñānasaṃbhava.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­531

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 84 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­42
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­94-95
  • 2.­99-100
  • 3.­12-13
  • 3.­20-21
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­27-29
  • 3.­31-34
  • 3.­41-43
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­67
  • 3.­71
  • 3.­79-83
  • 3.­89
  • 3.­92-94
  • 3.­96-97
  • 3.­101
  • 3.­103-104
  • 3.­107
  • 3.­114-117
  • 3.­124
  • 3.­126-127
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­5-6
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­73
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­169
  • 4.­205
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­266-268
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­281-282
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­394
  • 4.­498
  • 4.­545
  • 4.­548
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­106
  • n.­82
  • n.­106
  • n.­391
  • n.­427
  • g.­153
g.­532

Śāntaprajñākara

Wylie:
  • zhi ba dang shes rab ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ་དང་ཤེས་རབ་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • śānta­prajñā­kara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-sixth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­533

Śāntimati

Wylie:
  • blo gros zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāntimati

A bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra who asks the Buddha why he appeared in an impure realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­28
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­4
g.­534

sapphire

Wylie:
  • an da rnyil
Tibetan:
  • ཨན་ད་རྙིལ།
Sanskrit:
  • indranīla

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­16
  • 4.­394
  • 5.­124
  • 5.­126
  • g.­556
g.­535

Sapta­ratna­vicitrasan­darśana

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun rnam par bkra bar snang ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན་རྣམ་པར་བཀྲ་བར་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta­ratna­vicitrasan­darśana

A Bodhi tree, the name meaning “The Lovely Appearance of a Variety of the Seven Jewels.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­63
g.­536

Sārabhuja

Wylie:
  • snying po spyod
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་པོ་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • sārabhuja

The fifth of the five young brahmin attendants of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Haripatracūḍabhadra, the 1,004th of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269
  • 4.­273
  • n.­287
g.­537

Saracchighoṣa

Wylie:
  • sgra bzang
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • saracchighoṣa

A brahmin who asks King Ambara, a previous life of Śākyamuni, for his ears.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­132
g.­538

Sārajyoti

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sārajyoti

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­539

Sārakusumita

Wylie:
  • snying po me tog rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་པོ་མེ་ཏོག་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • sārakusumita

One of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal the Buddha Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­82
  • 5.­92
  • g.­480
  • g.­481
g.­540

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

Along with Mahā­maudgalyāyana, one of the Buddha Śākyamuni’s two main disciples, known as the foremost in terms of insight.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­381
  • g.­340
  • g.­529
g.­541

Sārthavādi

Wylie:
  • don bcas gsung
Tibetan:
  • དོན་བཅས་གསུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sārthavādi

The thousand and second of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­43
  • 4.­269
  • g.­207
g.­542

Sārthavrata

Wylie:
  • don bcas brtul zhugs
Tibetan:
  • དོན་བཅས་བརྟུལ་ཞུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • sārthavrata

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-seventh) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­543

Sarvaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • kun dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvaghoṣa

The southern realm in which the bodhisattva Dharaṇidatta became the Buddha Saṃkaramardārci.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­80
g.­544

Sarvālaṅkāra­vibhūṣita

Wylie:
  • rgyan thams cad kyis brgyan pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱན་ཐམས་ཅད་ཀྱིས་བརྒྱན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvālaṅkāra­vibhūṣita

The buddha realm of the Buddha Sālendrarāja in the distant past. Maitreya was a disciple of that buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­26
  • 2.­76
g.­545

Sarvaṃdada

Wylie:
  • thams cad sbyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྦྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvaṃdada

The name given by the devas to the cakravartin Ambara, a previous life of Śākyamuni, on account of his generosity. It means “The One Who Gives Away Everything.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­54
  • 5.­127
  • 5.­129
g.­546

Sarva­ratna­saṃnicaya

Wylie:
  • rin po che thams cad yang dag par bsags pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་ཐམས་ཅད་ཡང་དག་པར་བསགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarva­ratna­saṃnicaya

Literally “An Accumulation of All Jewels.” Prince Avalokiteśvara will attain complete enlightenment and become the Tathāgata Samantaraśmyabhyudgataśrīkūṭarāja in this realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­39
g.­547

Sarvaśokāpagata

Wylie:
  • mya ngan thams cad dang bral ba
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ཐམས་ཅད་དང་བྲལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvaśokāpagata

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­42
g.­548

Śataguṇa

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • n.­417
g.­549

Satyasaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • bde ’byung
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • satyasaṃbhava

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­550

Saurabhyā Kiṃśukā

Wylie:
  • nyi gdugs snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་གདུགས་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • saurabhyā kiṃśukā

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­551

Saurabhyākiṃśukā

Wylie:
  • des pa king shu ka
Tibetan:
  • དེས་པ་ཀིང་ཤུ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • saurabhyākiṃśukā

A mountain goddess who prays to be Samudrareṇu’s wife when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Yaśodhara.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­532
g.­552

Savirocana

Wylie:
  • legs par rnam par byed
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པར་རྣམ་པར་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • savirocana

Śākyamuni’s previous life as a Śakra deity who terrifies people into good behavior.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­147
g.­553

Śayama

Wylie:
  • bsam pa dpog
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་པ་དཔོག
Sanskrit:
  • śayama

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­554

sensory bases

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­55
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­384
  • 4.­413
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­55
  • 5.­118
g.­555

sensory elements

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the context of Buddhist philosophy, one way to describe experience in terms of eighteen elements (eye, form, and eye consciousness; ear, sound, and ear consciousness; nose, smell, and nose consciousness; tongue, taste, and tongue consciousness; body, touch, and body consciousness; and mind, mental phenomena, and mind consciousness).

This also refers to the elements of the world, which can be enumerated as four, five, or six. The four elements are earth, water, fire, and air. A fifth, space, is often added, and the sixth is consciousness.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­173
  • 4.­384
  • 4.­413
  • 5.­53
g.­556

seven jewels

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptaratna

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The set of seven precious materials or substances includes a range of precious metals and gems, but their exact list varies. The set often consists of gold, silver, beryl, crystal, red pearls, emeralds, and white coral, but may also contain lapis lazuli, ruby, sapphire, chrysoberyl, diamonds, etc. The term is frequently used in the sūtras to exemplify preciousness, wealth, and beauty, and can describe treasures, offering materials, or the features of architectural structures such as stūpas, palaces, thrones, etc. The set is also used to describe the beauty and prosperity of buddha realms and the realms of the gods.

In other contexts, the term saptaratna can also refer to the seven precious possessions of a cakravartin or to a set of seven precious moral qualities.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­14-15
  • 1.­17
  • 1.­19
  • 3.­14-15
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­116
  • 3.­118
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­159-160
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­267
  • 4.­323
  • 4.­501
  • 4.­503
  • 5.­54
  • 6.­20
  • n.­23
  • n.­196
  • g.­535
g.­557

seven riches

Wylie:
  • nor bdun
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptadhana

The seven noble riches are faith, correct conduct, hearing the Dharma, generosity, a sense of shame, a conscience, and wisdom.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­116
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­318
  • 5.­93
g.­558

Śikhin

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śikhin

In early Buddhism the first of the seven buddhas, with Śākyamuni as the seventh. The first three buddhas‍—Vipaśyin, Śikhin, and Viśvabhu‍—are in an earlier eon than the Bhadraka eon, and therefore Śākyamuni is more commonly referred to as the fourth buddha. In The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra, those three buddhas are the last of thirty of the countless buddhas preceding Śākyamuni, and when the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies the buddhahood of Samudrareṇu’s thirty million pupils, the last three pupils, unnamed, are prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha to become the Buddhas Vipaśyin, Śikhin, and Viśvabhu.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­224
  • n.­278
  • g.­719
  • g.­730
g.­559

Śikhin

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śikhin

The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that one of his eighty brothers (the fourteenth) will be a buddha with this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­560

Śīla­prabhāsvara

Wylie:
  • tshul khrims ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས་འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śīla­prabhāsvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­561

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

The name of the eleventh son of King Araṇemin, who becomes the bodhisattva Ratnaketu and is prophesied to become the Buddha Nāga­vinarditeśvara­ghoṣa in the realm Abhirati, when it is renamed Jayasoma.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­181
  • g.­5
  • g.­361
g.­562

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

The sixth buddha of the Bhadraka eon. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that an unnamed Veda-reciting pupil of Samudrareṇu will be the Buddha Siṃha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­42
  • 4.­258
g.­563

Siṃhagandha

Wylie:
  • seng ge spos
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་སྤོས།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhagandha

The bodhisattva who is the seventh son of King Araḅemi and is prophesied to become the Buddha Prabhāsavirajaḥ­samucchraya­gandheśvara­rāja.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­120-122
  • 4.­134
  • 4.­431
  • g.­38
g.­564

Siṃhaketu

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i tog
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhaketu

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­565

Siṃhakīrti

Wylie:
  • seng ge grags pa
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhakīrti

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­566

Siṃhamati

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhamati

A bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8-9
g.­567

Siṃhanandi

Wylie:
  • seng ge dga’
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhanandi

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­568

Siṃhavajraketu

Wylie:
  • seng ge rdo rje’i tog
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་རྡོ་རྗེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhavajraketu

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Siṃhavijṛṃbhiteśvararāja to the realm of the Buddha Ratnagarbha to make offerings to Mahākāruṇika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­479
g.­569

Siṃhavijṛmbhita

Wylie:
  • seng ge ltar bsgyings pa
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་ལྟར་བསྒྱིངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhavijṛmbhita

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Jitendriya­viśāla­netra to the realm of the Buddha Ratnagarbha to make offerings to Mahākāruṇika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­480
g.­570

Siṃha­vijṛmbhita­rāja

Wylie:
  • seng ge bsgyings pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་བསྒྱིངས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha­vijṛmbhita­rāja

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­571

Siṃha­vijṛmbhiteśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • seng ge ltar bsgyings pa’i dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་ལྟར་བསྒྱིངས་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha­vijṛmbhiteśvara­rāja

A buddha in a southern realm who sends bodhisattvas to make offerings to Mahākāruṇika.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­479
  • g.­243
g.­572

Siṃhavikrama

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i rtsal
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་རྩལ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhavikrama

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the eighteenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­573

Śiva

Wylie:
  • gu lang
Tibetan:
  • གུ་ལང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śiva

Otherwise called Maheśvara, one of the principal deities of the Brahmanical tradition.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 5.­114
  • g.­197
  • g.­321
g.­574

six conducive qualities

Wylie:
  • 'thun pa'i chos drug
Tibetan:
  • འཐུན་པའི་ཆོས་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­276
  • 4.­375
  • 4.­540
g.­575

śrāvaka

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 40 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­2
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­8-9
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­23-24
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­58
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­49-50
  • 4.­52
  • 4.­57
  • 4.­109
  • 4.­127
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­157
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­169
  • 4.­247-248
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­519
  • 4.­521
  • 5.­158
  • 6.­78
  • n.­29
  • n.­119
  • g.­340
  • g.­434
  • g.­576
g.­576

Śrāvakayāna

Wylie:
  • nyan thos kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvakayāna

The vehicle comprising the teaching of the śrāvakas, those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat by seeking self-liberation. The śrāvakas are typically defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard by others.”

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • i.­29
  • 2.­62
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­51
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­346-347
  • 4.­349-350
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­360
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­383
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­495
  • 4.­513
  • 4.­522-523
  • 4.­543
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­77
  • 5.­104-105
  • 5.­141
  • 5.­149-150
  • 5.­157
  • 6.­25
  • n.­115
g.­577

Śreṣṭha

Wylie:
  • thu bo
Tibetan:
  • ཐུ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śreṣṭha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-fifth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­578

Śrīkūṭa­jñāna­buddhi

Wylie:
  • ye shes dpal brtsegs blo
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་དཔལ་བརྩེགས་བློ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīkūṭa­jñāna­buddhi

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­579

Śrīmahāviraja

Wylie:
  • nga rgyal dpal dang rdul bral
Tibetan:
  • ང་རྒྱལ་དཔལ་དང་རྡུལ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīmahāviraja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­580

Śrīsaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • dpal ’byung
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīsaṃbhava

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­581

state of infinite consciousness

Wylie:
  • rnam shes mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཤེས་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vijñānānantyāyatana

The second level of the four levels of the formless realm and its meditation, when everything is perceived as consciousness.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­582

state of infinite space

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśānantyāyatana

The first of the four levels of the formless realm and its meditation, when all appears to be space.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­583

state of neither perception nor nonperception

Wylie:
  • ’du shes med ’du shes med min skye mched
Tibetan:
  • འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་མིན་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • naiva­saṃjñānā­saṃjñāyatana

The fourth and highest level in the formless realm and its meditation.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­584

state of nothingness

Wylie:
  • ci yang med pa’i skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ཅི་ཡང་མེད་པའི་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ākiñcanyāyatana

The third of the four levels of the formless realm and its meditation, when there is the perception of nothingness.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­585

state of subjugation

Wylie:
  • zil gyis gnon pa’i skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ཟིལ་གྱིས་གནོན་པའི་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • abhi­bhavāyatana

State when the power of meditation is more powerful than any perception, which therefore cannot disturb it.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­586

state of totality

Wylie:
  • zad par gyi skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ཟད་པར་གྱི་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛtsnāyatana

State of meditation in which one can transform whatever is perceived.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­390
g.­587

Sthālabhuja

Wylie:
  • thang la spyod
Tibetan:
  • ཐང་ལ་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • sthālabhuja

The second of the five young brahmin attendants of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Sukhendriyamati, the 1,001st of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269
g.­588

Sthānanemin

Wylie:
  • gnas kyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • གནས་ཀྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • sthānanemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­589

Stream enterer

Wylie:
  • rgyun du zhugs pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་དུ་ཞུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotāpatti

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One who has achieved the first level of attainment on the path of the śrāvakas, and who has entered the “stream” of practice that leads to nirvāṇa. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­25
g.­590

strengths

Wylie:
  • stobs
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • bala

The five strengths are a stronger form of the five powers.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­14
  • 2.­13
  • 4.­73
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­243
  • 4.­263
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­53
  • g.­151
g.­591

stūpa

Wylie:
  • mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • stūpa

A stūpa, literally “heap” or “mound,” is a mounded or circular structure usually containing relics of the Buddha or the masters of the past. It is considered to be a sacred object representing the awakened mind of a buddha, but the symbolism of the stūpa is complex, and its design varies throughout the Buddhist world. Stūpas continue to be erected today as objects of veneration and merit making.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­50
  • 4.­545
  • 5.­54
  • g.­391
g.­592

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • legs mthong lha
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་མཐོང་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-fourth) when he becomes a buddha. The Tibetan adds lha, which is not reflected in the Sanskrit.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­593

Śuddha­virajaḥ­sannicaya

Wylie:
  • dag pa rdul bral yang dag bsags
Tibetan:
  • དག་པ་རྡུལ་བྲལ་ཡང་དག་བསགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddha­virajaḥ­sannicaya

The southern realm in which the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī will become a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­37
g.­594

Śuddhodana

Wylie:
  • zas gtsang
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་གཙང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhodana

The name of the Buddha Śākyamuni’s father.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­376
g.­595

Śuddhodana

Wylie:
  • zas gtsang
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་གཙང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhodana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-third) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­596

Sugandha

Wylie:
  • dri zhim
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཞིམ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugandha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-third) when he becomes a buddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­597

Sugandha­bīja­nairātma

Wylie:
  • dri zhim sa bon bdag med
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཞིམ་ས་བོན་བདག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • sugandha­bīja­nairātma

One of ten names of a thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha, with presumably a hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­145
g.­598

sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the standard epithets of the buddhas. A recurrent explanation offers three different meanings for su- that are meant to show the special qualities of “accomplishment of one’s own purpose” (svārthasampad) for a complete buddha. Thus, the Sugata is “well” gone, as in the expression su-rūpa (“having a good form”); he is gone “in a way that he shall not come back,” as in the expression su-naṣṭa-jvara (“a fever that has utterly gone”); and he has gone “without any remainder” as in the expression su-pūrṇa-ghaṭa (“a pot that is completely full”). According to Buddhaghoṣa, the term means that the way the Buddha went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su) and where he went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su).

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­20
  • 2.­76
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­243-244
  • 5.­87
g.­599

Sukhāvatī

Wylie:
  • bde ba can
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sukhāvatī

The realm of the Buddha Amitāyus, more commonly known as Amitābha, as first described in the Sukhāvatīvyūha Sūtra.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • i.­36
  • 2.­16
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­29
  • 6.­66
  • g.­29
  • g.­40
  • g.­317
  • g.­379
  • g.­612
g.­600

Sukhendriyamati

Wylie:
  • bde dbang blo gros
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་དབང་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sukhendriyamati

The 1,001st of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­43
  • 4.­269
  • g.­587
g.­601

Sukusuma

Wylie:
  • yang dag me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • sukusuma

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-seventh) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­602

Sumana

Wylie:
  • sna ma’i me tog
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་མའི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • sumana

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­603

Sumanojñasvaranir­ghoṣa

Wylie:
  • sgra dbyangs yid du ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་དབྱངས་ཡིད་དུ་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumanojñasvara­nirghoṣa

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­604

Sumanoratha

Wylie:
  • thugs kyi re ba bzang
Tibetan:
  • ཐུགས་ཀྱི་རེ་བ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sumanoratha

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-eighth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­605

Sumeru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumeru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­15
  • 2.­34
  • 3.­119
  • 3.­121
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­409
  • 5.­105
  • 6.­65
  • g.­93
  • g.­485
  • g.­646
g.­606

Sunda

Wylie:
  • mdzes pa
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunda

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-fifth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­607

Sunetra

Wylie:
  • spyan bzang
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sunetra

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of two of his eighty brothers (the thirty-third and the fifty-first) when he becomes a buddha. Note that this name appears twice in the Sanskrit version of this list of names, though it is translated differently in the Tibetan.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­204
  • n.­265
g.­608

Sunijasta

Wylie:
  • rab spong
Tibetan:
  • རབ་སྤོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sunijasta

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-sixth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­609

Sunirmita

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunirmita

The principal deity in the Nirmāṇarata paradise, the second highest paradise in the desire realm.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­92
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­102
  • 3.­104
  • 3.­106-107
g.­610

sunstone

Wylie:
  • me shel
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཤེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryakānta

In Sanskrit their name means “sunstone” and in Tibetan “fire crystal.” The Indian sunstones are orange to gold-colored gems that exhibit aventurescence in that they are filled with speckles that appear to emit light.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­16
  • 3.­31
g.­611

Supratiṣṭhita

Wylie:
  • rab tu brtan pa
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་བརྟན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • supratiṣṭhita

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­612

Supra­tiṣṭhita­guṇa­maṇikūṭa­rāja

Wylie:
  • rab du brtan pa yon tan nor bu brtsegs pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རབ་དུ་བརྟན་པ་ཡོན་ཏན་ནོར་བུ་བརྩེགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • supratiṣṭhita­guṇa­maṇikūṭa­rāja

The name at buddhahood of the bodhisattva Mahāsthāmaprāpta when he becomes the buddha in Sukhāvatī. The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra describes how he became a bodhisattva while being Prince Nimi.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­40
  • g.­317
  • g.­379
g.­613

Supra­tiṣṭhitasthāma­vikrama

Wylie:
  • shin tu brtan pa mthus gnon pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བརྟན་པ་མཐུས་གནོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • supra­tiṣṭhitasthāma­vikrama

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­614

Surendrabodhi

Wylie:
  • su ren dra bo dhi
Tibetan:
  • སུ་རེན་དྲ་བོ་དྷི།
Sanskrit:
  • surendrabodhi

An Indian master who came to Tibet during the reign of King Ralpachen (r. 815–38 ᴄᴇ) and helped in the translation of forty-three Kangyur texts.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­615

Sūrya

Wylie:
  • nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya

The deity of the sun.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­321
  • 4.­341
  • 6.­14
g.­616

Sūryagarbha

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryagarbha

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm. He is not mentioned anywhere else in the Kangyur. The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the sixty-ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­204
  • 6.­5
  • n.­444
g.­617

Sūrya­garbhārci­vimalendra

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i snying po’i ’od zer dri ma med pa’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་སྙིང་པོའི་འོད་ཟེར་དྲི་མ་མེད་པའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya­garbhārci­vimalendra

The name of the bodhisattva Prajñārciḥ­saṃkopita­daṣṭa when he became a buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­83
  • g.­73
g.­618

Sūryaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryaghoṣa

The name of five hundred buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­143
g.­619

Sūryamālagandha

Wylie:
  • nyi phreng spos
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་ཕྲེང་སྤོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryamālagandha

Śākyamuni’s previous life as a brahmin who begins a tradition of medicine.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­118
  • g.­520
g.­620

Sūryanandi

Wylie:
  • nyi dga’
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryanandi

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the thirty-first) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­621

Sūryanemin

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryanemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­622

Sūryapratiṣṭhita

Wylie:
  • nyi ma gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya­pratiṣṭhita

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­623

Suvarṇapuṣpa

Wylie:
  • gser gyi me tog yongs su myan nga las ’das
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་མེ་ཏོག་ཡོངས་སུ་མྱན་ང་ལས་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇapuṣpa

The Buddha that Himaṇi, the tenth son of King Araṇemin, is prophesied to become in Abhirati after the Buddha Akṣobhya has passed into nirvāṇa.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­182
  • g.­5
  • g.­193
  • g.­218
  • g.­361
  • g.­455
g.­624

Suvidita

Wylie:
  • shin tu rtog pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྟོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvidita

A southern buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­625

Suvimala­ghoṣeśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • shin tu dri med dbyangs kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་དྲི་མེད་དབྱངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • suvimala­ghoṣeśvara­rāja

The name of one thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­142
g.­626

Suyāma

Wylie:
  • rab ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • suyāma

The principal deity in the Yāma paradise.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­85-86
  • 3.­92
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­102
  • 3.­104
  • 3.­106-107
g.­627

Svagupta

Wylie:
  • legs sbas
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་སྦས།
Sanskrit:
  • svagupta

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­628

Svajñānapuṇyabala

Wylie:
  • rang gi ye shes bsod nams stobs
Tibetan:
  • རང་གི་ཡེ་ཤེས་བསོད་ནམས་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • svajñāna­puṇyabala

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­629

Svaraja

Wylie:
  • shin tu rdul med
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྡུལ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • svaraja

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­630

Svarajñakośa

Wylie:
  • dbyangs mkhyen mdzod
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་མཁྱེན་མཛོད།
Sanskrit:
  • svarajñakośa

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­631

Svargavairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད་ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • svargavairocana

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Vigata­bhaya­paryutthāna­ghoṣa to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­482
g.­632

Svaviṣaya­saṃkopita­viṣaya

Wylie:
  • rang gis rnam par ’byed pas yul yang dag par ’khrug pa
Tibetan:
  • རང་གིས་རྣམ་པར་འབྱེད་པས་ཡུལ་ཡང་དག་པར་འཁྲུག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • svaviṣaya­saṃkopita­viṣaya

A bodhisattva who comes from the realm of the Buddha Prasphulitakusuma­vairocana to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­487
  • 4.­494
g.­633

Syajala

Wylie:
  • sprin chung
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • syajala

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­634

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 323 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8-11
  • 1.­19-26
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­17-18
  • 2.­20-23
  • 2.­35-36
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-48
  • 2.­51
  • 2.­53
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­90-92
  • 3.­7-9
  • 3.­11-15
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­24-25
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­33-34
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­55-56
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­94
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­123-124
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­10-11
  • 4.­13-15
  • 4.­22-23
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­32-33
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­39-40
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­71
  • 4.­80-81
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­92-93
  • 4.­98-99
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­121-123
  • 4.­134
  • 4.­137-138
  • 4.­140-142
  • 4.­146
  • 4.­148
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­155
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­172
  • 4.­174
  • 4.­177
  • 4.­179
  • 4.­181-182
  • 4.­184-185
  • 4.­187-191
  • 4.­196-197
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­202-206
  • 4.­208
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­221-222
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­228
  • 4.­230
  • 4.­232-237
  • 4.­240-242
  • 4.­245-246
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­255-256
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­269
  • 4.­272-273
  • 4.­278
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­284-285
  • 4.­289
  • 4.­293
  • 4.­304-305
  • 4.­308
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­372
  • 4.­375-376
  • 4.­379
  • 4.­399-401
  • 4.­405
  • 4.­408
  • 4.­415-416
  • 4.­430
  • 4.­460
  • 4.­462-464
  • 4.­467-469
  • 4.­474-477
  • 4.­479-484
  • 4.­486-488
  • 4.­492-494
  • 4.­496-497
  • 4.­499-504
  • 4.­510
  • 4.­514-519
  • 4.­523
  • 4.­525-526
  • 4.­536-537
  • 4.­539
  • 4.­543-547
  • 4.­553-555
  • 5.­1-2
  • 5.­47
  • 5.­49-51
  • 5.­53-55
  • 5.­57
  • 5.­72
  • 5.­80-85
  • 5.­93
  • 5.­108
  • 5.­117
  • 5.­123
  • 5.­146
  • 5.­158
  • 6.­4-5
  • 6.­7-15
  • 6.­17-21
  • 6.­23-25
  • 6.­27-29
  • 6.­31-40
  • 6.­42-47
  • 6.­49-52
  • 6.­54-64
  • 6.­68-72
  • 6.­76-78
  • n.­4
  • n.­30
  • n.­87
  • n.­117
  • n.­140
  • n.­272
  • n.­389
  • n.­417
  • g.­42
  • g.­202
  • g.­309
  • g.­344
  • g.­546
  • g.­638
  • g.­721
g.­635

Tejeśvaraprabhāsa

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid dbang phyug ’od
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་དབང་ཕྱུག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • tejeśvara­prabhāsa

A buddha in a southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­636

ten bad actions

Wylie:
  • mi dge ba bcu’i las kyi lam
Tibetan:
  • མི་དགེ་བ་བཅུའི་ལས་ཀྱི་ལམ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśākuśalakarmapatha

There are three physical unwholesome or nonvirtuous actions: killing, stealing, and illicit sex. There are four verbal nonvirtues: lying, backbiting, insulting, and babbling nonsense. And there are three mental nonvirtues: coveting, malice, and wrong view‍.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­328
g.­637

ten good courses of action

Wylie:
  • dge ba bcu’i las kyi lam
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བ་བཅུའི་ལས་ཀྱི་ལམ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśakuśala­karma­patha

These are the opposite of the ten nonvirtuous courses of action, i.e., refraining from engaging in activities related to the ten nonvirtuous courses of action and doing the opposite. There are three physical virtues: saving lives, giving, and sexual propriety. There are four verbal virtues: truthfulness, reconciling disharmony, gentle speech, and religious speech. There are three mental virtues: a loving attitude, a generous attitude, and right views.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­246
  • 4.­306
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­392
g.­638

ten strengths of a tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa'i stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པའི་སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśa­tathā­gata­bala AD

The ten powers of the tathāgatas are: (1) definitive knowledge that things which are possible are indeed possible; (2) definitive knowledge that things which are impossible are indeed impossible; (3) definitive knowledge, through possibilities and causes, of the maturation of past, future, and present actions, and of those who undertake such actions; (4) definitive knowledge of multiple world systems and diverse dispositions; (5) definitive knowledge of the diversity of inclinations and the multiplicity of inclinations that other sentient beings and other individuals have; (6) definitive knowledge of whether the acumen of other sentient beings and other individuals is supreme or not; (7) definitive knowledge of the paths that lead anywhere; (8) definitive knowledge of all the afflicted and purified mental states and their emergence, with respect to the faculties, powers, branches of enlightenment, aspects of liberation, meditative concentrations, meditative stabilities, and formless absorptions; (9) definitive knowledge of the recollection of multiple past abodes, and of the transference of consciousness at the death and birth of all sentient beings; and (10) definitive knowledge that through one’s own extrasensory powers one has actualized, achieved, and maintained in this very lifetime the liberation of mind and the liberation of wisdom in the state that is free from contaminants because all contaminants have ceased.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­376
  • 6.­73
g.­639

Thirty-two signs of a great being

Wylie:
  • skye bu chen po'i mtshan sum cu rtsa gnyis
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་བུ་ཆེན་པོའི་མཚན་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvātriṃśanmahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa AD

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­98
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­110
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­278
  • 4.­359
  • 5.­143
  • 5.­146
g.­640

three activities that create merit

Wylie:
  • bsod nams bya ba’i dngos po rnam pa gsum po
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་བྱ་བའི་དངོས་པོ་རྣམ་པ་གསུམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­41
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­49-50
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­328
g.­641

three excellent types of conduct

Wylie:
  • legs par spyod pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པར་སྤྱོད་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Virtuous actions of body, speech, and mind.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­306
  • 4.­328
g.­642

three wicked types of conduct

Wylie:
  • nyes par spyod pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • ཉེས་པར་སྤྱོད་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­328
g.­643

Timira

Wylie:
  • rab rib can
Tibetan:
  • རབ་རིབ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • timira

A name of the Sahā realm in an earlier eon.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­118
  • 5.­121-123
g.­644

tīrthika

Wylie:
  • mu stegs can
Tibetan:
  • མུ་སྟེགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • tīrthika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Those of other religious or philosophical orders, contemporary with the early Buddhist order, including Jains, Jaṭilas, Ājīvikas, and Cārvākas. Tīrthika (“forder”) literally translates as “one belonging to or associated with (possessive suffix –ika) stairs for landing or for descent into a river,” or “a bathing place,” or “a place of pilgrimage on the banks of sacred streams” (Monier-Williams). The term may have originally referred to temple priests at river crossings or fords where travelers propitiated a deity before crossing. The Sanskrit term seems to have undergone metonymic transfer in referring to those able to ford the turbulent river of saṃsāra (as in the Jain tīrthaṅkaras, “ford makers”), and it came to be used in Buddhist sources to refer to teachers of rival religious traditions. The Sanskrit term is closely rendered by the Tibetan mu stegs pa: “those on the steps (stegs pa) at the edge (mu).”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­157
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­552
g.­645

Tīvrakaluṣa­saṃkṣobhana

Wylie:
  • rtsod rnyog mi bzad yang dag ’khrug
Tibetan:
  • རྩོད་རྙོག་མི་བཟད་ཡང་དག་འཁྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • tīvrakaluṣa­saṃkṣobhana

The name of a future eon in which the bodhisattva Saṃrocana will become the Buddha Acintyarocana.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­84
g.­646

Trāyastriṃśa

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • trāyastriṃśa

The paradise on the summit of Sumeru.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 3.­94-95
  • 3.­103
  • 4.­161
  • 5.­108
  • 6.­22
g.­647

Tumburu

Wylie:
  • tam bu ru
Tibetan:
  • ཏམ་བུ་རུ།
Sanskrit:
  • tumburu

The second of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Kanakamuni, the second buddha in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­235
  • 4.­237
g.­648

Udumbarapuṣpa

Wylie:
  • u dum bA ra’i me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་དུམ་བཱ་རའི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • udumbarapuṣpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­649

upādhyāya

Wylie:
  • mkhan po
Tibetan:
  • མཁན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upādhyāya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A person’s particular preceptor within the monastic tradition. They must have at least ten years of standing in the saṅgha, and their role is to confer ordination, to tend to the student, and to provide all the necessary requisites, therefore guiding that person for the taking of full vows and the maintenance of conduct and practice. This office was decreed by the Buddha so that aspirants would not have to receive ordination from the Buddha in person, and the Buddha identified two types: those who grant entry into the renunciate order and those who grant full ordination. The Tibetan translation mkhan po has also come to mean “a learned scholar,” the equivalent of a paṇḍita, but that is not the intended meaning in Indic Buddhist literature.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­66
  • 4.­226
  • 4.­264
g.­650

Upananda

Wylie:
  • nye dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upananda

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of eight mythological nāga kings. The story of the two nāga kings Upananda and Nanda and their taming by the Buddha and Maudgalyāyana is told in the Vinayavibhaṅga (Toh 3, Degé vol. 6, ’dul ba, ja, F.221.a–224.a).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 4.­153
g.­651

upāsaka

Wylie:
  • dge bsnyan
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བསྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • upāsaka

An unordained male practitioner who observes the five precepts not to kill, lie, steal, be intoxicated, or commit sexual misconduct.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­79
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­383
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­546
  • 5.­55
g.­652

Upaśāntamati

Wylie:
  • blo gros nye bar zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ཉེ་བར་ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • upaśāntamati

A western buddha realm that the Buddha Śākyamuni sees.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­46
g.­653

upāsikā

Wylie:
  • dge bsnyan ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བསྙན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • upāsikā

An unordained female practitioner who observes the five precepts not to kill, lie, steal, be intoxicated, or commit sexual misconduct.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­79
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­546
g.­654

upoṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • upoṣadha

The eight vows kept by laypeople on the four sacred days of the month: the full-, new-, and half-moon days.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­356
  • 4.­390
  • 5.­96
g.­655

uragasāra sandalwood

Wylie:
  • tsan dan sbrul gyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་སྦྲུལ་གྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • uragasāra

A variety of sandalwood. The name means “snake essence” because snakes were said to live in the forests of those trees because they were attracted to their scent.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­16
  • 3.­77
  • 3.­81-82
  • 4.­54
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­118-119
  • 4.­158
  • 4.­176-177
  • 4.­279
g.­656

ūrṇā hair

Wylie:
  • mdzod spu
Tibetan:
  • མཛོད་སྤུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ūrṇā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the thirty-two marks of a great being. It consists of a soft, long, fine, coiled white hair between the eyebrows capable of emitting an intense bright light. Literally, the Sanskrit ūrṇā means “wool hair,” and kośa means “treasure.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­257
g.­657

uṣṇīṣa

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the thirty-two signs, or major marks, of a great being. In its simplest form it is a pointed shape of the head like a turban (the Sanskrit term, uṣṇīṣa, in fact means “turban”), or more elaborately a dome-shaped extension. The extension is described as having various extraordinary attributes such as emitting and absorbing rays of light or reaching an immense height.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 3.­114
g.­658

Utpala

Wylie:
  • ud pa la
Tibetan:
  • ཨུད་པ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • utpala

The name for a past eon, in which Śākyamuni was a śakra deity.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­147
g.­659

Utpalacandra

Wylie:
  • ud pa la zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཨུད་པ་ལ་ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • utpalacandra

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu but is not mentioned elsewhere in the sūtra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­449
g.­660

Utpalahasta

Wylie:
  • lag na ud pa la
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་ཨུད་པ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • utpalahasta

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu but is not mentioned elsewhere in the Kangyur.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­443
g.­661

Utpalasaṃtīraṇa

Wylie:
  • ud pa la yang dag rtog
Tibetan:
  • ཨུད་པ་ལ་ཡང་དག་རྟོག
Sanskrit:
  • utpala­saṃtīraṇa

The name of the eon in which the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s eighty brothers will become buddhas in the realm named Baliṣṭhā.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­197
  • 4.­202
  • 4.­205-206
g.­662

Uttapta­muni­jñāneśvara

Wylie:
  • thub chen ye shes ’bar ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་ཆེན་ཡེ་ཤེས་འབར་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • uttaptamuni­jñāneśvara

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­663

Uttara

Wylie:
  • bla ma
Tibetan:
  • བླ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • uttara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the tenth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­664

Vaḍa

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaḍa

A name of a Jambudvīpa in an earlier eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­124
  • n.­440
g.­665

Vairaprabha

Wylie:
  • khon sbyong ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཁོན་སྦྱོང་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairaprabha

The name of an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­666

Vairocanadharma

Wylie:
  • chos rnam par snang mdzad
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana­dharma

The name that the bodhisattva Prahasitabāhu will have when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­85
g.­667

Vairocanakusuma

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang mdzad me tog
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana­kusuma

The buddha that Saṃbhava, the second of Samudrareṇu’s eighty sons, is prophesied to become.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­202
  • g.­66
  • g.­502
g.­668

Vairocanamati

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed blo gros
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocanamati

A bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8-9
g.­669

Vaiśāradya­samavasaraṇa

Wylie:
  • ’jigs med yang dag gzhol
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་མེད་ཡང་དག་གཞོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśāradya­samavasaraṇa

A bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra. The Buddha addresses him in particular at one point.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­90
g.­670

Vaiśāradya­samuddhāraṇi

Wylie:
  • ’jigs med yang dag ’dren
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་མེད་ཡང་དག་འདྲེན།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśāradya­samuddhāraṇi

A bodhisattva who asks Śākyamuni for the title of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra. He appears nowhere else in the Kangyur.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­59
  • 6.­82
  • 6.­84
g.­671

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

As one of the four mahārājas, he is the lord of the northern region of the world and the northern continent, though in early Buddhism he is the lord of the far north of India and beyond. He is also the lord of the yakṣas and a lord of wealth. There is one in each four-continent world.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 3.­72
  • 3.­74
  • 3.­78-79
  • 3.­81
  • 3.­85
  • 3.­108
  • 6.­14
  • g.­314
g.­672

vajra

Wylie:
  • rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term generally indicates indestructibility and stability. In the sūtras, vajra most often refers to the hardest possible physical substance, said to have divine origins. In some scriptures, it is also the name of the all-powerful weapon of Indra, which in turn is crafted from vajra material. In the tantras, the vajra is sometimes a scepter-like ritual implement, but the term can also take on other esoteric meanings.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­52
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­64-65
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­299
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344-345
  • 4.­371
  • 5.­3
  • 6.­86
  • n.­203
  • n.­207
  • g.­413
g.­673

Vajraccheda­prajñā­vabhāsaśrī

Wylie:
  • rdo rjes gcod pa shes rab snang ba’i dpal
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེས་གཅོད་པ་ཤེས་རབ་སྣང་བའི་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajraccheda­prajñāvabhāsaśrī

The bodhisattva name given to Anaṅgaṇa, the fourth son of King Araṇemin.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­78-79
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­188
  • 4.­427
  • g.­35
g.­674

Vajradhvaja

Wylie:
  • rdo rje rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • vajradhvaja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­675

Vajrakīrti

Wylie:
  • rdo rje grags pa
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrakīrti

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­676

Vajranemin

Wylie:
  • rdo rje’i mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེའི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • vajranemin

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­677

Vajraprabhāsa

Wylie:
  • rdo rje’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vajraprabhāsa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-second) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­678

Vajrapradīpa

Wylie:
  • rdo rje’i sgron ma
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེའི་སྒྲོན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapradīpa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­679

Vajrāsana

Wylie:
  • rdo rje’i gdan
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེའི་གདན།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrāsana

The spot on which the buddha attained Buddhahood. Also Vajrāsana refers to the Bodhgayā area.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­153
g.­680

Vajrasiṃha

Wylie:
  • rdo rje seng ge
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • vajrasiṃha

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­681

Vajrottama

Wylie:
  • rdo rje mchog
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • vajrottama

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­682

Varaprajña

Wylie:
  • shes rab mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • varaprajña

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-ninth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­683

Vararaśmikośa

Wylie:
  • ’od zer mchog
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • vararaśmikośa

A buddha in a western buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­684

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu yi lha
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཡི་ལྷ།
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa

The name of one of the oldest of the Vedic gods, associated with the waters.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­114
g.­685

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu yi lha
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཡི་ལྷ།
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa

The name of a bodhisattva present at the teaching of The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8-9
g.­686

Varuṇa­cāritra­nakṣatrā

Wylie:
  • rgyu skar gyi lha mo chu lha spyod
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་སྐར་གྱི་ལྷ་མོ་ཆུ་ལྷ་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa­cāritra­nakṣatrā

A goddess who prays to become the Buddha Śamudrareṇu’s wet nurse when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Mahāprajāpatī.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • 4.­529
g.­687

Vaśavartin

Wylie:
  • dbang sgyur
Tibetan:
  • དབང་སྒྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • vaśavartin

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­688

Vāyuviṣṇu

Wylie:
  • khyab ’jug rlung
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་འཇུག་རླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vāyuviṣṇu

The eldest of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins whom the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will become the Buddha Śalendrarāja

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • i.­45
  • i.­47
  • 4.­225-226
  • 4.­228-230
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­522
  • g.­274
  • g.­491
g.­689

Veda-reciting brahmins

Wylie:
  • rig byed klog pa
Tibetan:
  • རིག་བྱེད་ཀློག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vedapāṭhaka

Brahmins who memorize and chant the Vedas, the authoritative scriptures of the Brahmanical tradition.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­224-225
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­305
  • g.­254
  • g.­491
  • g.­647
  • g.­688
  • g.­712
  • g.­731
g.­690

Vegabhuja

Wylie:
  • shugs kyis spyod
Tibetan:
  • ཤུགས་ཀྱིས་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vegabhuja

The fourth of the five young brahmin attendants of the brahmin Samudrareṇu. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Priyaprasanna, the 1,003rd of the 1,005 buddhas in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­267
  • 4.­269
g.­691

Vegavairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vegavairocana

A bodhisattva, the sixth son of King Araṇemin, who will become the Buddha Dharmavaśavarīśvararāja. Note that the Tibetan translation does not reflect vega but only vairocana.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 4.­98-99
  • 4.­429
  • g.­26
g.­692

Veṭaka

Wylie:
  • khri byed
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲི་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • veṭaka

A deva who made offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­90
g.­693

Vidvagañja­karuṇāśraya

Wylie:
  • mkhas mdzod snying rje rten
Tibetan:
  • མཁས་མཛོད་སྙིང་རྗེ་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidvagañja­karuṇāśraya

The bodhisattva name given to Viśvagupta, the third of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmin pupils of Samudrareṇu.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­241-242
  • g.­731
g.­694

Vigata­bhaya­kīrti­rāja

Wylie:
  • ’jigs bral grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་བྲལ་གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigata­bhaya­kīrti­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­695

Vigata­bhaya­paryutthāna­ghoṣa

Wylie:
  • kun nas ldang ba’i ’jigs pa dang bral ba’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་ལྡང་བའི་འཇིགས་པ་དང་བྲལ་བའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vigata­bhaya­paryutthāna­ghoṣa

A buddha in a realm in the downward direction who sends bodhisattvas to make offerings to the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • 4.­482
  • g.­46
  • g.­631
  • g.­701
g.­696

Vigatabhayasaṃtāpa

Wylie:
  • ’jigs pa’i gdung bral
  • ’jigs dang gdung bral
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་པའི་གདུང་བྲལ།
  • འཇིགས་དང་གདུང་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigatabhaya­saṃtāpa

The youngest of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s eighty brothers, whom he prophesies will become the Buddha Vigata­raja­samudgatābhyudgata­rāja.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­205-208
  • 4.­441
g.­697

Vigata­raja­samudgatābhyudgata­rāja

Wylie:
  • rdul bral yang dag ’phags mngon ’phags
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་བྲལ་ཡང་དག་འཕགས་མངོན་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vigata­raja­samudgatābhyudgata­rāja

The last of the eighty buddhas in the Baliṣṭha realm during the Utpalasanīraṇa eon, as prophesied for Vigatabhyasaṃtāpa, the youngest of the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s brothers.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­38
  • 4.­206
  • g.­696
g.­698

Vigataraśmi

Wylie:
  • ’od zer bral
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigataraśmi

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­699

Vigataraśmighoṣa

Wylie:
  • ’od zer bral ba’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་བྲལ་བའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vigataraśmighoṣa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­700

Vigata­saṃtāpodbhava­vaiśravaṇasāla­rāja

Wylie:
  • gdung bral mngon par ’phags pa rnam thos kyi bu sA la’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གདུང་བྲལ་མངོན་པར་འཕགས་པ་རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ་སཱ་ལའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigata­saṃtāpodbhava­vaiśravaṇasāla­rāja

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­49-51
  • 6.­58
  • g.­514
  • g.­702
g.­701

Vigatatamondhakārā

Wylie:
  • gti mug mun bral
Tibetan:
  • གཏི་མུག་མུན་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigatatamondhakārā

A realm below the Buddha Ratnagarbha’s realm in which resides the Buddha Vigata­bhaya­paryutthāna­ghoṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­482
g.­702

Vigopaśikhara

Wylie:
  • ’khrugs med rtse mo
Tibetan:
  • འཁྲུགས་མེད་རྩེ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vigopaśikhara

A bodhisattva sent by the Buddha Vigata­saṃtāpodbhava­vaiśravaṇasāla­rāja to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­51
  • 6.­58
g.­703

Viguṇamoharāja

Wylie:
  • ti mug rnam bral yon tan rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཏི་མུག་རྣམ་བྲལ་ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • viguṇamoharāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­704

Vijaya

Wylie:
  • rnam par rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vijaya

A buddha realm in the northeast.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­49
  • 6.­60
g.­705

Vijitaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • rgyal sgra dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་སྒྲ་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vijitaghoṣa

A name of the Sahā realm in an earlier eon.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­124
  • 5.­126
  • 5.­144
  • n.­430
  • n.­434
g.­706

Vikasitojjaya

Wylie:
  • rgyas pa dang rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱས་པ་དང་རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vikasitojjaya

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the twenty-second) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­707

Vikramaraśmi

Wylie:
  • rnam par gnon pa chen po’i ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གནོན་པ་ཆེན་པོའི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • vikramaraśmi

A buddha in a northeastern realm who sends bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­63
g.­708

Vimala­ghoṣa­tejeśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • dri med dbyangs kyi gzi brjid dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད་དབྱངས་ཀྱི་གཟི་བརྗིད་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala­ghoṣa­tejeśvara­rāja

The name of one thousand buddhas prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­142
g.­709

Vimalanetra

Wylie:
  • dri med spyan
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད་སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalanetra

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­710

Vimalanetra

Wylie:
  • dri med spyan
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད་སྤྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalanetra

The name of a buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­711

Vimalateja­guṇa­rāja

Wylie:
  • dri med gzi brjid yon tan rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད་གཟི་བརྗིད་ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalateja­guṇa­rāja

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm. He sends two bodhisattvas to pay homage to Śākyamuni.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­56-57
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­13-15
  • 6.­17
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­35-37
  • g.­258
  • g.­430
g.­712

Vimalavaiśāyana

Wylie:
  • bgrod bya’i bu dri ma med
Tibetan:
  • བགྲོད་བྱའི་བུ་དྲི་མ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalavaiśāyana

The fourth of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins. The Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies that he will be the Buddha Maitreya, the fifth buddha in the Bhadraka eon. Note that the Tibetan translation differs from the name found in the extant Sanskrit.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­255-256
g.­713

Vimalendra

Wylie:
  • dri med dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalendra

A bodhisattva who praises the brahmin Samudrareṇu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­451
g.­714

Vinarditarāja

Wylie:
  • sgrogs pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲོགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vinarditarāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­715

Vinaya

Wylie:
  • ’dul ba
Tibetan:
  • འདུལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vinaya

The vows and texts pertaining to monastic discipline. One of the three piṭakas, or “baskets,” of the Buddhist canon, the one dealing specifically with the code of monastic discipline.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­384
  • 4.­408
  • g.­399
g.­716

Vinītabuddhi

Wylie:
  • shin tu dul ba’i blo
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་དུལ་བའི་བློ།
Sanskrit:
  • vinītabuddhi

A sea goddess who prays to become the Buddha Śamudrareṇu’s mother when he is the Buddha Śākyamuni, i.e., Māyādevī.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • 4.­528
g.­717

Vipara­dharmakīrti­ghoṣa

Wylie:
  • grags pa’i dbang phyug dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vipara­dharmakīrtighoṣa

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­718

vipaśyanā

Wylie:
  • lhag mthong
Tibetan:
  • ལྷག་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyanā

An important form of Buddhist meditation focusing on developing insight into the nature of phenomena. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, the other being śamatha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­390
  • 5.­16
  • 5.­48
g.­719

Vipaśyin

Wylie:
  • rnam par gzigs
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyin

In early Buddhism the first of the seven buddhas, with Śākyamuni as the seventh. In The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra, those three buddhas are the last of thirty of countless buddhas preceding Śakyamuni, and when the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies the buddhahood of Samudrareṇu’s thirty million pupils, the last three pupils, unnamed, are prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha to become the Buddhas Vipaśyin, Śikhin, and Viśvabhu.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­224
  • n.­278
  • g.­558
  • g.­730
g.­720

Viraja­vīreśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • byang chub rdul bral rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་རྡུལ་བྲལ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virajavīreśvara­rāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­721

Virati

Wylie:
  • rnam par dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • virati

One thousand intermediate eons after Acintyamatiguṇarāja has passed into parinirvāṇa and his dharma has come too an end, the buddha realm Meruprabhā will be named Virati. The Tathāgata Raśmi will reside in this buddha realm and give teachings.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­14
  • g.­42
g.­722

Virūḍhadhvaja

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhadhvaja

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-fifth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­723

Virūḍhaka

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes po
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhaka

One of the four mahārājas. He is the guardian of the southern direction and the lord of the kumbhāṇḍas. There is one in each four-continent world.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 3.­84-85
  • 6.­14
  • g.­296
  • g.­314
g.­724

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa

One of the four mahārājas. He is the guardian of the western direction and the lord of the nāgas. There is a Virūpākṣa in each four-continent world.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 3.­84-85
  • 6.­14
  • g.­314
g.­725

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fifty-sixth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­726

Vīryasaṃcodana

Wylie:
  • brtson 'grus yang dag skul
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་ཡང་དག་སྐུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vīryasaṃcodana

One of only eight bodhisattvas in the past or future who equal the Buddha Śākyamuni’s generosity in his previous lives.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­51
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­92
  • g.­17
g.­727

Viśiṣṭagandha

Wylie:
  • dri mchog
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • viśiṣṭagandha

A southern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­43
g.­728

Viṣṇu

Wylie:
  • khyab ’jug
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་འཇུག
Sanskrit:
  • viṣṇu

One of the primary gods of the Brahmanical tradition, he is associated with the preservation and continuance of the universe.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • n.­332
  • g.­197
  • g.­369
g.­729

Visṛṣṭa­dharma­rāja

Wylie:
  • chos sbyin rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྦྱིན་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • visṛṣṭa­dharma­rāja

One of the two names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for a group of a thousand buddhas, with presumably five hundred buddhas having this name.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­146
g.­730

Viśvabhu

Wylie:
  • thams cad skyob
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྐྱོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvabhu

In early Buddhism the first of the seven buddhas, with Śākyamuni as the seventh. The first three buddhas‍—Vipaśyin, Śikhin, and Viśvabhu‍—are in an earlier eon than the Bhadraka eon, and therefore Śākyamuni is more commonly referred to as the fourth buddha. In The White Lotus of Compassion Sūtra, those three Buddhas are the last of thirty of countless buddhas preceding Śākyamuni, and when the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies the buddhahood of Samudrareṇu’s thirty million pupils, the last three pupils, unnamed, are prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha to become the Buddhas Vipaśyin, Śikhin, and Viśvabhu.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­224
  • n.­278
  • g.­558
  • g.­719
g.­731

Viśvagupta

Wylie:
  • kun gyis bsrungs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་གྱིས་བསྲུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvagupta

The third of the thousand young Veda-reciting brahmins. The Buddha Ratnagarbha names him the bodhisattva Vidvagañja­karuṇāśraya and prophesies that he will be the Buddha Kāśyapa, the third buddha in the Bhadraka eon.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 4.­240-241
  • g.­693
g.­732

Vulture Peak Mountain

Wylie:
  • rgod kyi phung po
Tibetan:
  • རྒོད་ཀྱི་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gṛdhrakūṭa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gṛdhra­kūṭa, literally Vulture Peak, was a hill located in the kingdom of Magadha, in the vicinity of the ancient city of Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir, in the state of Bihar, India), where the Buddha bestowed many sūtras, especially the Great Vehicle teachings, such as the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras. It continues to be a sacred pilgrimage site for Buddhists to this day.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­23
  • 1.­2
  • 2.­35-36
  • 5.­49
  • 5.­105
  • 5.­140
  • 6.­36
  • 6.­60
g.­733

Vyāghraraśmi

Wylie:
  • stag gi ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • སྟག་གི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • vyāghraraśmi

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the seventy-fourth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­734

Vyāghraraśmi

Wylie:
  • stag gi ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • སྟག་གི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • vyāghraraśmi

A buddha in an eastern buddha realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­5
g.­735

Vyayadharmakīrti

Wylie:
  • rnam rgyal chos grags
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་རྒྱལ་ཆོས་གྲགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vyaya­dharma­kīrti

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­736

Vyūharāja

Wylie:
  • bkod pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vyūharāja

One of the hundred names prophesied by the Buddha Ratnagarbha for 2,500 buddhas, presumably the name of twenty-five of those buddhas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­144
g.­737

watch

Wylie:
  • thun
Tibetan:
  • ཐུན།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

One of the divisions of the night into four night-watches, each being approximately three hours long.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 1.­22
  • 2.­20
  • n.­24
g.­738

water that has the eight good qualities

Wylie:
  • yan lag brgyad dang ldan pa’i char
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་དང་ལྡན་པའི་ཆར།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­159
g.­739

world of Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje’i ’jig rten
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེའི་འཇིག་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • yamaloka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The land of the dead ruled over by the Lord of Death. In Buddhism it refers to the preta realm, where beings generally suffer from hunger and thirst, which in traditional Brahmanism is the fate of those departed without descendants to make ancestral offerings.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­101
  • 4.­156
  • 4.­292
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­513
g.­740

Yadhvaja

Wylie:
  • gro ba’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • གྲོ་བའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • yadhvaja

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­741

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 55 passages in the translation:

  • i.­27
  • i.­33
  • i.­55
  • i.­57
  • i.­59
  • 1.­5
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­87
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­71-72
  • 3.­74-75
  • 3.­77
  • 3.­79-80
  • 3.­82-83
  • 3.­114
  • 3.­117
  • 4.­133
  • 4.­319
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­406
  • 4.­411
  • 4.­413
  • 4.­549-550
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­103
  • 5.­105-106
  • 5.­115
  • 5.­121
  • 5.­148
  • 5.­152
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­22-23
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­55
  • 6.­85
  • 6.­88
  • 6.­90
  • n.­421
  • n.­428
  • g.­200
  • g.­346
  • g.­671
g.­742

Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yama

The lord of death who judges the dead and rules over the hells.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­93
  • 3.­108
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­87
  • 4.­107
  • 4.­331
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­549
  • 5.­106
  • 6.­68
  • n.­17
  • n.­154
  • n.­369
g.­743

Yāma

Wylie:
  • thab bral
Tibetan:
  • ཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

Third (counting from the lowest) of the six paradises in the desire realm.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­96
  • 4.­82
  • g.­626
g.­744

Yamāna

Wylie:
  • nges ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • ངེས་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yamāna

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­745

yāna

Wylie:
  • theg pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāna AD

A “way of going,” which primarily means a path or a way. It can also mean a conveyance or carriage, which definition within commentarial literature is represented in the Tibetan “carrier,” and therefore also translated into English as “vehicle.”

Located in 52 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­2
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­167
  • 4.­196
  • 4.­205
  • 4.­218
  • 4.­233
  • 4.­246-248
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­278
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­328
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­343-344
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­387-388
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­396-397
  • 4.­480
  • 4.­482-483
  • 4.­514
  • 4.­546-549
  • 5.­54-55
  • 5.­62-63
  • 5.­67
  • 5.­76
  • 5.­78
  • 5.­106
  • 5.­117
  • 5.­121-122
  • 5.­124
  • 5.­143
  • 5.­150-151
  • 6.­17
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­54
  • 6.­86
g.­746

Yārmatha

Wylie:
  • yar ma tha
  • ya ma tha
Tibetan:
  • ཡར་མ་ཐ།
  • ཡ་མ་ཐ།
Sanskrit:
  • yārmatha

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­747

Yaśodharā

Wylie:
  • grags ’dzin ma
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་འཛིན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśodharā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Daughter of Śākya Daṇḍadhara (more commonly Daṇḍapāṇi), sister of Iṣudhara and Aniruddha, she was the wife of Prince Siddhārtha and mother of his only child, Rāhula. After Prince Siddhārtha left his kingdom and attained awakening as the Buddha, she became his disciple and one of the first women to be ordained as a bhikṣunī. She attained the level of an arhat, a worthy one, endowed with the six superknowledges.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­48
  • n.­383
g.­748

Yaśonandin

Wylie:
  • snyan pa dang dga’ can
Tibetan:
  • སྙན་པ་དང་དགའ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśonandin

Divided into two names in the Tibetan but appears as one name in the Sanskrit and Chinese. The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the fortieth) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­749

Yaśottara

Wylie:
  • grags mchog
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • yaśottara

The name that the Buddha Ratnagarbha prophesies will be that of one of his eighty brothers (the forty-first) when he becomes a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­204
g.­750

Yasyana

Wylie:
  • yas sya na
Tibetan:
  • ཡས་སྱ་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • yasyana

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­751

Yatrava

Wylie:
  • sdom brtson ’khor
Tibetan:
  • སྡོམ་བརྩོན་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • yatrava

One of the thousand sons of King Araṇemin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­33
g.­752

Yeshé Dé

Wylie:
  • ye shes sde
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • none

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Yeshé Dé (late eighth to early ninth century) was the most prolific translator of sūtras into Tibetan. Altogether he is credited with the translation of more than one hundred sixty sūtra translations and more than one hundred additional translations, mostly on tantric topics. In spite of Yeshé Dé’s great importance for the propagation of Buddhism in Tibet during the imperial era, only a few biographical details about this figure are known. Later sources describe him as a student of the Indian teacher Padmasambhava, and he is also credited with teaching both sūtra and tantra widely to students of his own. He was also known as Nanam Yeshé Dé, from the Nanam (sna nam) clan.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­753

yojana

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana

The longest unit of distance in classical India. The lack of a uniform standard for the smaller units means that there is no precise equivalent, especially as its theoretical length tended to increase over time. Therefore, it can mean between four and ten miles.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • i.­58
  • 1.­14-19
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­15
  • 3.­36
  • 4.­5-6
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­160
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­385
  • 4.­505
  • 4.­507
  • 4.­510
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­104
  • 5.­126
  • 5.­140
  • 6.­64
  • n.­22
  • n.­34
  • n.­45
  • n.­413
g.­754

Yugandhara

Wylie:
  • gnya’ shing ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • གཉའ་ཤིང་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yugandhara

A mountain range that encircles Meru, between Meru and the continents.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­105
0
    You are downloading:

    The White Lotus of Compassion

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The White Lotus of Compassion (Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka, snying rje pad ma dkar po, Toh 112). Translated by Peter Alan Roberts and team. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024. https://84000.co/translation/toh112/UT22084-050-003-glossary.Copy
    84000. The White Lotus of Compassion (Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka, snying rje pad ma dkar po, Toh 112). Translated by Peter Alan Roberts and team, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024, 84000.co/translation/toh112/UT22084-050-003-glossary.Copy
    84000. (2024) The White Lotus of Compassion (Karuṇā­puṇḍarīka, snying rje pad ma dkar po, Toh 112). (Peter Alan Roberts and team, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh112/UT22084-050-003-glossary.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from General Sūtra Section
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy